RKC Instrument GZ900 Instruction Manual



®

Temperature Controller

RKC INSTRUMENT INC.

GZ400/GZ900

Instruction Manual

[Host Communication]

IMR03D07-E1

NOTICE

This manual assumes that the reader has a fundamental knowledge of the principles of electricity, process control, computer technology and communications.

 The figures, diagrams and numeric values used in this manual are only for explanation purpose.

 RKC is not responsible for any damage or injury that is caused as a result of using this instrument, instrument failure or indirect damage.

 RKC is not responsible for any damage and/or injury resulting from the use of instruments made by imitating this instrument.

 Periodic maintenance is required for safe and proper operation of this instrument. Some components have a limited service life, or characteristics that change over time.

 Every effort has been made to ensure accuracy of all information contained herein. RKC makes no warranty, expressed or implied, with respect to the accuracy of the information.

The information in this manual is subject to change without prior notice.

 No portion of this document may be reprinted, modified, copied, transmitted, digitized, stored, processed or retrieved through any mechanical, electronic, optical or other means without prior written approval from RKC.

 Windows is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

 Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric.

 Company names and product names used in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective companies.

All Rights Reserved, Copyright  2019, RKC INSTRUMENT INC.

Safety Precautions

 Pictorial Symbols (safety symbols)

Various pictorial symbols are used in this manual to ensure safe use of the product, to protect you and other people from harm, and to prevent damage to property. The symbols are described below.

Be sure you thoroughly understand the meaning of the symbols before reading this manual.

:

This mark indicates precautions that must be taken if there is danger of electric shock, fire, etc., which could result in loss of life or injury.

:

This mark indicates that if these precautions and operating procedures are not taken, damage to the instrument may result.

: This mark indicates that all precautions should be taken for safe usage.

 To prevent injury to persons, damage to the instrument and the equipment, a suitable external protection device shall be required.

 All wiring must be completed before power is turned on to prevent electric shock, fire or damage to the instrument and the equipment.

 This instrument must be used in accordance with the specifications to prevent fire or damage to the instrument and the equipment.

 This instrument is not intended for use in locations subject to flammable or explosive gases.

 Do not touch high-voltage connections such as power supply terminals, etc. to avoid electric shock.

 RKC is not responsible if this instrument is repaired, modified or disassembled by other than factory-approved personnel. Malfunction may occur and warranty is void under these conditions.

IMR03D07-E1 i-1

i-2

●

This product is intended for use with industrial machines, test and measuring equipment.

(It is not designed for use with medical equipment and nuclear energy plant.)

●

This is a Class A instrument. In a domestic environment, this instrument may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take additional measures.

●

This instrument is protected from electric shock by reinforced insulation. Provide reinforced insulation between the wire for the input signal and the wires for instrument power supply, source of power and loads.

●

Be sure to provide an appropriate surge control circuit respectively for the following:

- If input/output or signal lines within the building are longer than 30 meters.

- If input/output or signal lines leave the building, regardless the length.

●

This instrument is designed for installation in an enclosed instrumentation panel. All high-voltage connections such as power supply terminals must be enclosed in the instrumentation panel to avoid electric shock to operating personnel.

●

All precautions described in this manual should be taken to avoid damage to the instrument or equipment.

●

If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.

●

All wiring must be in accordance with local codes and regulations.

●

To prevent instrument damage as a result of failure, protect the power line and the input/output lines from high currents with a suitable overcurrent protection device with adequate breaking capacity such as a fuse, circuit breaker, etc.

●

A malfunction in this product may occasionally make control operations impossible or prevent alarm outputs, resulting in a possible hazard. Take appropriate measures in the end use to prevent hazards in the event of malfunction.

●

Prevent metal fragments or lead wire scraps from falling inside instrument case to avoid electric shock, fire or malfunction.

●

Tighten each terminal screw to the specified torque found in the manual to avoid electric shock, fire or malfunction.

●

For proper operation of this instrument, provide adequate ventilation for heat dissipation.

●

Do not connect wires to unused terminals as this will interfere with proper operation of the instrument.

●

Turn off the power supply before cleaning the instrument.

●

Do not use a volatile solvent such as paint thinner to clean the instrument. Deformation or discoloration may occur. Use a soft, dry cloth to remove stains from the instrument.

●

To avoid damage to the instrument display, do not rub with an abrasive material or push the front panel with a hard object.



For Proper Disposal



When disposing of each part used for this instrument, always follows the procedure for disposing of industrial wastes stipulated by the respective local community.

IMR03D07-E1

Symbols

 Pictorial Symbols (safety symbols)

: This mark indicates important information on installation, handling and operating procedures.

: This mark indicates supplemental information on installation, handling and operating procedures.

: This mark indicates where additional information may be located.

 Character Symbols

11-segment character

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Period

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - .

A B (b) C c D (d) E F G H I J K

A b C c D E F G H I J K

L M N n o P Q R S T t U u V W X Y Z ／ Prime

＊

( Asterisk )

→ u V W X Y Z @ / ` Š ‹

7-segment character

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Period

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - .

A B (b) C c D (d) E F G H I J K

A b C c D E F G H I J K

L M N (n) O (o) P Q R S T t U u

L M n o P Q R S T t U u

V W X Y Z ／ Prime

＊

( Asterisk )

V W X Y Z @ ` Š

IMR03D07-E1 i-3

 Abbreviation symbols

These abbreviations are used in this manual:

Abbreviation symbols

Name

PV

SV

MV

AT

Measured value

Set value

Manipulated output value

Autotuning

ST Startup tuning

OUT (1 to 3) Output (1 to 3)

DI (1 to 6) Digital input (1 to 6)

DO (1 to 4) Digital output (1 to 4)

Abbreviation symbols

Name

TC (input) Thermocouple (input)

RTD (input) Resistance temperature detector (input)

V (input)

I (input)

Voltage (input)

Current (input)

HBA (1, 2) Heater break alarm (1, 2)

CT (1, 2) Current transformer (1, 2)

LBA

LBD

Control loop break alarm

LBA deadband i-4 IMR03D07-E1

Document Configuration

There are seven manuals pertaining to this product. Please be sure to read all manuals specific to your application requirements.

The following manuals can be downloaded from the official RKC website: https://www.rkcinst.co.jp/english/download-center/

Manual

Manual

Number

Remarks

GZ400/GZ900 Installation Manual

GZ400/GZ900 Quick Operation Manual

GZ400/GZ900 Parameter List

GZ400/GZ900 Instruction Manual

[Part 1: Hardware]


[Part 2: Parameters/Functions]


[Host Communication]


[PLC Communication]

IMR03D01-E  This manual is enclosed with instrument.

This manual explains the mounting and wiring.


This manual explains the basic key operation, mode menu, and data setting.


This list is a compilation of the parameter data of each mode.

IMR03D04-E  This manual describes installation, wiring, troubleshooting and product specification.

IMR03D05-E  Parameters:

This manual describes how to switch the operation modes and parameters, the range of parameters, and initialization/automatic conversion associated with the change of settings.

Functions:

This manual describes how to set up and each function.

IMR03D07-E1 This manual you are reading now.

This manual explains RKC communication protocol (ANSI X3.28-1976) and Modbus relating to communication parameters setting.

IMR03D08-E  This manual describes how to set up the instrument for communication with a programmable controller (PLC).

Read this manual carefully before operating the instrument. Please place the manual in a convenient location for easy reference.

IMR03D07-E1 i-5

About This Manual

This manual consists of 8 chapters and an appendix. If you are looking for topics concerning the host communication, you may be able to find one in the following table.

What do you want to do?

See the following section for more details

1 OUTLINE  I want to know the features of the host communication

 I want to know how to connect to the host computer 2. WIRING

 I want to know how to connect to the loader communication device 2. WIRING

 I want to know how to set up the communication parameters

 I want to know the content of RKC communication protocol

3. PARAMETER SETTING

4. RKC COMMUNICATION

PROTOCOL

 I want to know the content of Modbus protocol

 I want to know how to use Modbus data mapping

 I want to know how to use Memory area data

 I want to check the data map structure

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

 I want to know how to read the table

6. COMMUNICATION DATA

LIST


LIST

 I want to check RKC communication/Modbus (double word)

[identifier, data register address, data attribute, data range and factory set values]

 I want to check Modbus data register address (single word)


LIST

 I want to check the communication data register address equivalent to the FB series


LIST

 I want to check the identifier and the communication data register address equivalent to the HA series

 I want to know how to cope with errors

 I want to know the specification of the host communication


LIST


LIST

7. TROUBLESHOOTING

8. SPECIFICATIONS

A. APPENDIX  I want to see the table of ASCII/JIS 7-bit code i-6 IMR03D07-E1

Contents

Page

NOTICE

Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................................... i-1

 Pictorial Symbols (safety symbols) .............................................................................................. i-1

WARNING ....................................................................................................................................... i-1

CAUTION ........................................................................................................................................ i-2

For Proper Disposal .............................................................................................................................. i-2

Symbols ................................................................................................................................................ i-3

 Pictorial Symbols (safety symbols) .............................................................................................. i-3

 Character Symbols ...................................................................................................................... i-3

 Abbreviation symbols ................................................................................................................... i-4

Document Configuration ....................................................................................................................... i-5

About This Manual ................................................................................................................................ i-6

1. OUTLINE ............................................................................ 1-1

Chapter 1 describes the host communication of GZ400/900.

2. WIRING .............................................................................. 2-1

Chapter 2 describes how to connect to the host computer.

2.1 Wiring Cautions ............................................................................................ 2-2

2.2 Wiring for Host Communication .................................................................... 2-3

2.2.1 Connection to the RS-485 port of GZ400/GZ900 ........................................................... 2-3

 Communication terminal number and signal details ........................................................ 2-3

 Connection to the RS-485 port of the host computer (master) ........................................ 2-4

 Connection to the RS-232C port of the host computer (master) ..................................... 2-5

 Connection to the USB of the host computer (master) .................................................... 2-6

2.2.2 Connection to the RS-422A port of GZ400/GZ900 ......................................................... 2-7

 Communication terminal number and signal details ........................................................ 2-7

 Connection to the RS-422A port of the host computer (master) ..................................... 2-8

 Connection to the RS-232C port of the host computer (master) ..................................... 2-9

 Connection to the USB of the host computer (master) .................................................. 2-10

2.3 Connections for Loader Communication .................................................... 2-11

 Position of loader communication connector ................................................................. 2-11

 Wiring method ................................................................................................................ 2-11

IMR03D07-E1 i-7

Page

3. PARAMETER SETTING .................................................... 3-1

Chapter 3 describes how to set up parameters necessary for the host communication.

3.1 Setting of Communication Parameter ........................................................... 3-2

3.1.1 Description of each parameter ........................................................................................ 3-2

3.1.2 Setting procedure ............................................................................................................ 3-4

3.2 Selection of Communication Data Type ....................................................... 3-5

3.2.1 Communication data type ............................................................................................... 3-5

3.2.2 Description of each parameter ........................................................................................ 3-6

3.2.3 Setting procedure ............................................................................................................ 3-7

3.3 Communication Requirements ..................................................................... 3-8

 Processing times during data send/receive ..................................................................... 3-8

 RS-485 (2-wire system) send/receive timing (RKC communication) ............................... 3-9

 Fail-safe ........................................................................................................................... 3-9

4. RKC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL .............................. 4-1

Chapter 4 describes the RKC communication protocol.

4.1 Polling ........................................................................................................... 4-2

4.1.1 Polling procedures .......................................................................................................... 4-3

4.1.2 Polling procedure example .............................................................................................. 4-7

4.2 Selecting ....................................................................................................... 4-8

4.2.1 Selecting procedures ...................................................................................................... 4-8

4.2.2 Selecting procedure example ........................................................................................ 4-12

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL ...................................................... 5-1

Chapter 5 describes the Modbus protocol.

5.1 Message Format ........................................................................................... 5-2

5.2 Function Code .............................................................................................. 5-3

5.3 Communication Mode ................................................................................... 5-3

5.4 Slave Responses .......................................................................................... 5-4

5.5 Calculating CRC-16 ...................................................................................... 5-5

5.6 Register Read and Write .............................................................................. 5-8

 Read holding registers [03H] ........................................................................................... 5-8

 Preset single register [06H] ............................................................................................ 5-10

 Diagnostics (Loopback test) [08H] ................................................................................. 5-11

 Preset multiple registers (Write multiple registers) [10H]............................................... 5-12

5.7 Caution for Handling Communication Data ................................................ 5-13

5.8 How to Use Modbus Data Mapping ............................................................ 5-15

5.9 How to Use Memory Area Data .................................................................. 5-18

5.9.1 Read and write of memory area data ............................................................................ 5-18

5.9.2 Control area transfer ..................................................................................................... 5-22 i-8 IMR03D07-E1

Page

6. COMMUNICATION DATA LIST ........................................ 6-1

Chapter 6 describes the communication data.

6.1 Data Map Structure ...................................................................................... 6-2

6.1.1 Structure of RKC Communication/Modbus (Double Word) data map ........................... 6-2

6.1.2 Structure of Modbus (Single Word) data map ............................................................... 6-4

6.1.3 Structure of HA series equivalent communication data map ......................................... 6-5

6.2 How to Read the Table ................................................................................ 6-6

 Data map of RKC communication identifiers/Modbus double word ................................ 6-6

 Data map of Modbus single word .................................................................................... 6-8

 Data map of HA series equivalent communication .......................................................... 6-9

 Data map of FB series equivalent communication ........................................................ 6-11

6.3 RKC Communication/Modbus (Double Word) Data .................................... 6-12

6.3.1 GZ400/GZ900 communication data

[RKC communication identifier/ Modbus double word] ................................................ 6-12

6.3.2 Memory area data (Direct designation method) [Modbus double word] ....................... 6-80

6.3.3 Data mapping address [Modbus double word] ............................................................. 6-98

6.3.4 HA series equivalent communication data

[RKC communication identifier/ Modbus double word] .............................................. 6-103

6.3.5 HA series equivalent memory area data ( Area designation method )

6.4 Modbus (Single Word) Data ..................................................................... 6-142

6.4.1 GZ400/GZ900 communication data [Modbus single word] ....................................... 6-142

6.4.2 Memory area data (Direct designation method) [Modbus single word] ..................... 6-152

6.4.3 Data mapping address [Modbus single word] ............................................................ 6-165

6.4.4 FB series equivalent communication data [Modbus single word] .............................. 6-169

6.4.5 Memory area data equivalent to the FB series (Area designation method)

7. TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................... 7-1

Chapter 7 describes how to cope with errors during the communication.

7.1 RKC Communication .................................................................................... 7-3

7.2 Modbus ........................................................................................................ 7-4

8. SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................. 8-1

Chapter 8 describes the specification of the host communication.

8.1 RKC Communication .................................................................................... 8-2

8.2 Modbus ........................................................................................................ 8-3

8.3 Loader Communication ................................................................................ 8-4

IMR03D07-E1 i-9

Page

A. APPENDIX........................................................................ A-1

A.1 ASCII 7-Bit Code Table ............................................................................... A-2

A.3 Communication Data Equivalent to Our REX-F400/700/900....................... A-3 i-10 IMR03D07-E1

OUTLINE

This chapter describes the host communication of GZ400/900.

IMR03D07-E1

1-1

1. OUTLINE

The communication function makes it possible to monitor and set the data of the Temperature Controller

GZ400/900 from a host computer. The GZ400/900 interfaces with the host computer via Modbus or RKC communication (ANSI X3.28-1976 subcategories 2.5 and A4) protocols. Communication function is available only when optional communication function has been specified at the time of ordering.

In addition, the controller GZ400/900 is equipped standard with a loader communication connector.

Therefore, loader communication is possible. For reference purposes, the Modbus protocol identifies the host computer as master, the controller as slave.



Host communication (RKC communication, Modbus) [Optional]

Communication interface: RS-485

RS-422A

 Multi-drop connection (Communication interface: RS-485)

One host computer (master) can communicate with up to 31 GZ400/900s.

Host computer (master)

RKC communication or Modbus

[Communication interface: RS-485, RS-422A

GZ400/900 (slave) maximum connections: Up to 31 controllers



Communication data type

There are such data as shown below for the communication with the computer.

Communication data type can be selected at Input data type ( INdT ).

For the Input data type, refer to 3.2 Selection of Communication Data Type (P. 3-5) .

 RKC communication

 7 digits data, Communication data of GZ400/900


 7 digits data, Communication data equivalent to our HA series (RKC communication identifiers

are

The RKC communication identifiers for the HA series can be used to handle the communication data of the GZ400/900 corresponding to the HA series.

If there is no relevant communication data on the GZ400/900, dummy data is used.

1. OUTLINE

 Modbus

 Double word, Communication data of GZ400/900

 Single word, Communication data of GZ400/900

 Single word, Communication data equivalent to our FB series (Modbus register addresses are

compatible)

The Modbus register addresses for the FB series can be used to handle the communication data of the GZ400/900 corresponding to the FB series.

If there is no relevant communication data on the GZ400/900, the data is handled as unused data.

 Double word, Communication data equivalent to our HA series (Modbus register addresses are

compatible)

The Modbus register addresses for the HA series can be used to handle the communication data of the GZ400/900 corresponding to the HA series.




Loader communication

Loader communication allows GZ400/900 data to be set from a personal computer.

By saving the data that was set using our Communication Tool PROTEM2 to a computer, the data can be transferred to other GZ400/900s, allowing setup to be accomplished much more quickly than when the data is set in each GZ400/900 using the front panel keys.

RKC USB communication converter COM-K2 (sold separately) is required for the loader communication.

Personal computer USB communication converter

COM-K2

GZ400/900

Maximum connections: 1 controller

The Loader port is only for parameter setup. Not used for data logging during operation.

Loader communication can be used on a GZ400/900 even when the Communication function

(optional) is not installed.

The loader communication corresponds to the RKC communication protocol “Based on ANSI

X3.28-1976 subcategories 2.5 and A4.”

A previous version of COM-K (version 1) can be also used. However, if communication tool

PROTEM2 is used using a COM-K, the PROTEM2 will not be supported by Windows 8 or later.



PLC communication

The PLC communication function makes it possible to monitor and set the data of the Temperature

Controller GZ400/900 from a programmable controller (PLC).

The GZ400/900 can be connected to the programmable controller (PLC) without using any program.

This manual describes the host communication (RKC communication and Modbus).

For the PLC communication, refer to GZ400/GZ900 Instruction Manual

[PLC Communication] (IMR03D08-E  ) .

IMR03D07-E1

1-3

1. OUTLINE



Communication Tool PROTEM2

PROTEM2 is an integrated configuration support software to manage parameter setting and measured values of our controllers (including GZ400/900).

The PROTEM2 can be downloaded from the official RKC website: https://www.rkcinst.co.jp/english/download-center/

Check our website for more details and operating environment of the PROTEM2.

PROTEM2 requires Microsoft.NET Framework 4 to be installed on the computer.

PROTEM2 can be used with RKC communication protocol and Modbus protocol.

PROTEM2 can also be used for loader communication and a host communication.

1-4

IMR03D07-E1

WIRING

This chapter describes how to connect to the host computer.

2.1 Wiring Cautions ................................................................................ 2-2

2.2 Wiring for Host Communication ....................................................... 2-3

2.2.1 Connection to the RS-485 port of GZ400/GZ900 ................................ 2-3

 Communication terminal number and signal details .............................. 2-3

 Connection to the RS-485 port of the host computer (master) .............. 2-4

 Connection to the RS-232C port of the host computer (master) ............ 2-5

 Connection to the USB of the host computer (master) .......................... 2-6

2.2.2 Connection to the RS-422A port of GZ400/GZ900 .............................. 2-7

 Communication terminal number and signal details .............................. 2-7

 Connection to the RS-422A port of the host computer (master) ............ 2-8

 Connection to the RS-232C port of the host computer (master) ............ 2-9

 Connection to the USB of the host computer (master) ........................ 2-10

2.3 Connections for Loader Communication ........................................ 2-11

 Position of loader communication connector ....................................... 2-11

 Wiring method ...................................................................................... 2-11

IMR03D07-E1

2-1

2. WIRING

To prevent electric shock or instrument failure, do not turn on the power until all wiring is completed. Make sure that the wiring is correct before applying power to the instrument.

2.1 Wiring Cautions

 To avoid noise induction, keep communication wire away from instrument power line, load lines and power lines of other electric equipment.

 Use the solderless terminal appropriate to the screw size.  5.9 (MAX)

 3.2 (MIN)

5.9 mm (MAX)

3.2 mm (MIN) Screw size: M3×7 (with 5.8×5.8 square washer)

Recommended tightening torque:

0.4 N ･ m [4 kgf ･ cm]

Applicable wire: Solid/twisted wire of 0.25 to 1.65 mm 2

5.6 mm (2.8 mm) 5.6 mm

Specified dimension:

Refer to Fig. at the right

Specified solderless terminal:

Manufactured by J.S.T MFG CO., LTD.

Circular terminal with isolation V1.25-MS3

 Make sure that during field wiring parts of conductors cannot come into contact with adjacent conductive parts.

 If solderless terminal lugs other than the recommended dimensions are used, terminal screws may not be tightened. In that case, bend each solderless terminal lug before wiring. If the terminal screw is forcibly tightened, it may be damaged.

 Up to two solderless terminal lugs can be connected to one terminal screw.

The requirements of reinforced insulation can be still complied with in this condition. When actually doing this, place one solderless terminal lug over the other as illustrated below.

Two solderless terminals are used overlapped

(GZ400)

Top view

Panel

(GZ400 is used in the example shown, but restrictions for crossover wiring are the same for GZ900.)

 When tightening a screw of the instrument, make sure to fit the screwdriver properly into the screw head mounted tilted or flat as shown in the right figure. Tightening the screw with excessive torque may damage the screw thread.

Tilted terminal Flat terminal

2.2 Wiring for Host Communication

Host communication is used for a connection to a host computer via RS-485 or RS-422A.

2.2.1 Connection to the RS-485 port of GZ400/GZ900



Communication terminal number and signal details

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

9

10

11

12

GZ400/900 rear terminals

29

30

31

32

25

26

27

28

33

34

35

36

17

18

19

20

13

14

15

16

21

22

23

24

Communication (Optional)

RS-485

SG 34

T/R (A) 35

T/R (B) 36

RS-485

GZ400/900 terminal No.

34 SG Signal ground

35

36

T/R (A)

T/R (B)

Send data/Receive data

Send data/Receive data

2. WIRING

IMR03D07-E1

2-3

2. WIRING



Connection to the RS-485 port of the host computer (master)



Wiring example

GZ400/900 (Slave) RS-485 Paired wire

Host computer (Master)

SG 34 SG

(  )

T/R (A) 35 T/R (A)

(  )

(  )

T/R (B) 36

*R

T/R (B)

(  )

Shielded twisted pair wire







GZ400/900 (Slave)

SG 34

(  )

T/R (A) 35

(  )

T/R (B) 36

*R

*R: Termination resistors (Example: 120  1/2 W)

If communication errors occur frequently due to the operation environment or the communication distance, connect termination resistors.

Maximum connections: Up to 31 GZ400/900s

The communication cable and termination resistor(s) must be provided by the customer.

2-4

IMR03D07-E1

2. WIRING



Connection to the RS-232C port of the host computer (master)

Use a RS-232C/RS-485 converter with an automatic send/receive transfer function.



Wiring example

GZ400/900 (Slave)

SG 34

(  )

T/R (A) 35

(  )

T/R (B) 36







GZ400/900 (Slave)

SG 34

(  )

T/R (A) 35

(  )

T/R (B) 36

*R

RS-485


Paired wire

SG

T/R (A)

RS-232C

Host computer

(Master)

T/R (B)

*R

RS-232C/RS-485 converter

Recommended:

CD485, CD485/V manufactured by

Data Link, Inc. or equivalent.





IMR03D07-E1

2-5

2. WIRING



Connection to the USB of the host computer (master)

Connect the USB communication converter between the host computer and the GZ400/900.



Wiring example


Connected to

USB port

GZ400/900 (Slave)

SG 34

(  )

T/R (A) 35

T/R (B) 36

RS-485

Paired wire

USB cable

(COM-K2 accessory)

(  )

1 SG

2 T/R (A)

3 T/R (B)

4 Unused

5 Unused

Connected to

USB port of a

COM-K2







GZ400/900 (Slave)

SG 34

(  )

T/R (A) 35


USB communication converter COM-K2 **

(RKC product)

** The termination resistor is built into the COM-K2.

(  )

T/R (B) 36

*R





Recommended USB communication converter: COM-K2 (RKC product)

For the COM-K2, refer to the COM-K2 Instruction Manual .


PROTEM 2 is used using a COM-K, the PROTEM2 will not be supported by Windows 8 or later.

2-6

IMR03D07-E1

2.2.2 Connection to the RS-422A port of GZ400/GZ900



Communication terminal number and signal details

GZ400/900 rear terminals

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

9

10

11

12

17

18

19

20

13

14

15

16

21

22

23

24

29

30

31

32

25

26

27

28

33

34

35

36

Communication (Optional)

R (A) 32

RS-422A

R (B) 33

SG

T (A)

T (B)

34

35

36

RS-422A

GZ400/900 terminal No. Symbol Signal name

32

33

34

35

36

R (A)

R (B)

T (A)

T (B)

Receive data

Receive data

Send data

Send data

2. WIRING

IMR03D07-E1

2-7

2. WIRING



Connection to the RS-422A port of the host computer (master)



Wiring example

GZ400/900 ( Slave )

(  )

R (A) 32

(  )

(  )

R (B)

SG

T (A)

33

34

35

(  )

T (B) 36







GZ400/900 ( Slave )

RS-422A

Paired wire

*R


T (A)

T (B)

SG

R (A)

(  )

(  )

(  )

R (B)

(  )


(  )

R (A) 32

(

(  )

(  )

R (B)

SG

T (A)

33

34

35

 )

T (B) 36

*R




The cable and termination resistor(s) must be provided by the customer.

2-8

IMR03D07-E1

2. WIRING



Connection to the RS-232C port of the host computer (master)

A RS-232C/RS-422A converter is required.



Wiring example


D-SUB 9-pin connector

W-BF-28

RS-232C

GZ400/900 (Slave)

(  )

(  )

R (A)

(  )

R (B)

32

33

SG 34

T (A) 35

T(A)

Blue

T(B)

Black

SG

Red

R(A)

White

R(B)

Orange

RS-232C/RS-422A converter

COM-A (RKC product)

RS-422A

W-BF-01

Connect to the

[COM.PORT1]

Connect to the

[COM.PORT2]

T (B) 36

(  )







GZ400/900 (Slave)

(  )

R (A)

(  )

R (A)

32

33

*R

SG 34

(  )

(  )

T (A) 35

T (B) 36




Cable type:

W-BF-01-3000 (RKC product, Sold separately)

[Standard cable length: 3 m]

W-BF-28-3000 (RKC product, Sold separately)

[Standard cable length: 3 m]

The cable and termination resistor(s) must be provided by the customer.

W-BF-01 or W-BF-28 communication cable (RKC product) can be used as communication cable

(sold separately). If noise is a factor, customer should use a twisted pair cable (not included) or something to that effect.

Recommended RS-232C/RS-422A converter: COM-A (RKC product)

For the COM-A, refer to the COM-A/COM-B Instruction Manual .

IMR03D07-E1

2-9

2. WIRING



Connection to the USB of the host computer (master)

Connect the USB communication converter between the host computer and the GZ400/900.



Wiring example


Connected to

USB port

GZ400/900 (Slave)

(  )

R (A) 32

(

(  )

(  )

R (B)

SG

T (A)

33

34

35

 )

T (B) 36







GZ400/900 (Slave)

(  )

R (A) 32

(

(  )

(  )

R (B)

SG

T (A)

33

34

35

 )

T (B) 36

*R

RS-422A

USB cable

(COM-K2 accessory)

1 SG

2

3

T (A)

T (B)

Connected to

USB port of a

COM-K2

4 R (A)


Paired wire

*R

5 R (B)

USB communication converter COM-K2 **

(RKC product)

** The termination resistor is built into the COM-K2.

*R: Termination resistors (Example: 120


 1/2 W)



Recommended USB communication converter: COM-K2 (RKC product)

For the COM-K2, refer to the COM-K2 Instruction Manual .



2-10

IMR03D07-E1

2. WIRING

2.3 Connections for Loader Communication



Position of loader communication connector

The loader communication connector can be found on the front of the instrument. In the following picture the connector cover is open.

GZ400

GZ900

Loader communication connector




Wiring method

Connect the GZ400/900, COM-K2, and personal computer using a USB cable and a loader communication cable. Make sure the connectors are oriented correctly when connecting.

The Loader port is only for parameter setup. Not used for data logging during operation.

Example: GZ900

USB cable 1 m

(COM-K2 accessory)

Connect to loader communication connector of the instrument

Connect to

USB port of a personal computer

Connect to USB connector

Loader communication cable 1.5 m (W-BV-05)

[COM-K2 optional]

USB communication converter COM-K2

Connect to loader communication connector


 Communication Tool

PROTEM2

Software operation environment:

Consult the manual that you downloaded

 Communication settings on the computer

(The following values are all fixed)

Communication speed: 38400 bps

Start bit: 1

Data bit: 8

Parity bit: Without

Stop bit: 1

 Communication port of host computer

USB port: Based on USB Ver. 2.0

 The device address of the loader communication is fixed at “0.” The setting of the device address is disregarded.

 The loader communication corresponds to the

RKC communication protocol “Based on ANSI

X3.28-1976 subcategories 2.5 and A4.”

 Loader communication can be used on a

GZ400/900 even when the Communication function (optional) is not installed.

Recommended USB communication converter:

COM-K2 (RKC product)

For the COM-K2, refer to the COM-K2

Instruction Manual .

When using the loader communication, USB driver for COM-K2 must be installed on the personal computer.

The USB driver for COM-K2 can be downloaded the official RKC website: https://www.rkcinst.co.jp/english/download-center/



IMR03D07-E1

2-11

2. WIRING

When the instrument is powered off, power can be supplied to the instrument from COM-K2 (or

COM-K version 1). This function is exclusive for parameter setting, and the instrument functions as follows.

 Control is stopped (Output is off, relay remains open).

 Host communication is stopped.

 The PV/SV monitor shows “ LoAd ” for the Measured value (PV) display and “----” for the Set value (SV) display. The LCD backlight is partially turned off.

While the instrument is powered by COM-K2 (or COM-K version 1), if power is applied to the instrument, the instrument will be reset and starts for normal operation.

When the instrument is normally powered, the host communication can be used simultaneously.

2-12

IMR03D07-E1

PARAMETER

SETTING

This chapter describes how to set up parameters necessary for the host communication.

3.1 Setting of Communication Parameter .............................................. 3-2

3.1.1 Description of each parameter ............................................................. 3-2

3.1.2 Setting procedure ................................................................................ 3-4

3.2 Selection of Communication Data Type ........................................... 3-5

3.2.1 Communication data type .................................................................... 3-5

3.2.2 Description of each parameter ............................................................. 3-6

3.2.3 Setting procedure ................................................................................ 3-7

3.3 Communication Requirements ......................................................... 3-8

 Processing times during data send/receive ............................................ 3-8

 RS-485 (2-wire system) send/receive timing (RKC communication) ...... 3-9

 Fail-safe .................................................................................................. 3-9

IMR03D07-E1

3-1


3.1 Setting of Communication Parameter

3.1.1 Description of each parameter

To establish communication between host computer (master) and GZ400/900 (slave), it is necessary to set the following parameters. The communication related parameters can be found in the Function block No. 60: communication ( SCI ) of Engineering mode.

The communication status can be monitored at “Communication response monitor.”



Function block No. 60: Communication (

SCI

)

No. Symbol Name Description

This is the first parameter symbol of Function block No. 60.

Factory set value

 

282

Fn60 Function block No.

60

CMPS Communication protocol

Select the communication protocol type.

0: RKC communication

1: Modbus

(Order of data transfer: to low-order word)

2: Modbus

(Order of data a transfer: to high-order word)

3: PLC communication

series special protocol

QnA-compatible 3C frame

When the communication protocol is specified at the time of order, the specified communication protocol will be the factory set value.

With communication, communication protocol not specified: 0

283

284

285

286

287

Add bPS bIT

INT

CMRM

Device address

Communication speed

Data bit configuration

Interval time

Communication response monitor

Do not set for the host

communication.

RKC communication: 0 to 99

Modbus: 1 to 99

PLC communication: 0 to 30

0: 2400 bps

1: 4800 bps

2: 9600 bps

3: 19200 bps

4: 38400 bps

5: 57600 bps

6: 115200 bps

0 to 11

Refer to Data bit configuration table (P. 3-3)

0 to 250 ms

Refer to  Communication response monitor (P. 3-3)

Do not use the same device address for more than one GZ400/900 in multi-drop connection.

Each GZ400/900 must have a unique address in multi-drop connection.

Set the same communication speed for both the GZ400/900 (slave) and the host computer (master).

Set the same data bit configuration for both the GZ400/900 (slave) and the host computer (master).

The Interval time is the waiting time between the receipt of the message from the host computer and the transmission of the reply message from GZ400/900.

Adjust the interval time when the switchover between send and receive is not appropriate.

Displays the communication state.

RKC communication: 0

Modbus: 1

PLC communication: 0

3

0

10




Data bit configuration table

Set value Data bit Parity bit Stop bit Set value Data bit Parity bit

6

7

8

7

7

7

Without

Without

Even

9

10

11

7

7

7

Even

Odd

Odd

Stop bit

1

2

1

2

1

2

: Not settable for Modbus

Interval time:

The interval time for the GZ400/900 should be set to provide a time for host computer to finish sending all data including stop bit and to switch the line to receive status for the host. If the interval time between the two is too short, the GZ400/900 may send data before the host computer is ready to receive it. In this case, communication transmission cannot be conducted correctly.

The communication protocol, device address (slave address), communication speed, data bit configuration, and interval time can also be set by loader communication using PROTEM2. It can also be set by host communication.



Communication response monitor


1.

CMRM

0000 0

SV display unit


0: Normal response

1: Overrun error

2: Parity error

4: Framing error

8: Receive buffer overflow

If two or more errors occur, the error values are summed up.

Errors are displayed in the hexadecimal format (0 to F).

0 (fixed)

Reception status monitor

Each time signal is received, 0 and 1 are displayed in turns.

Transmission status monitor

Each time signal is sent, 0 and 1 are displayed in turns.

Lights off

IMR03D07-E1

3-3


3.1.2 Setting procedure

The communication related parameters can be found in the Function block No. 60: Communication ( SCI ) of

Engineering mode.

Set value change and registration

 The flashing digit indicates which digit can be set. Press key to go to a different digit.

 To store a new value for the parameter, always press the key. The display changes to the next parameter and the new value will be stored. The modified data will not be stored only by operating the and keys.

 In case no operation is performed within 60 seconds after the change of the setting, the mode will return to

Monitor and SV setting mode. The modified data will not be registered in this case.



Setting procedure

To enter the Engineering mode

Monitor & SV setting mode

PV/SV monitor

0 28.0

00 0.0

Engneering mode

Function block No. 10

[Display]

Fn10 0

00 DSP

1.

(4 seconds * )

MODE

(2 seconds)

Several times


CMRM

0000

Check the

Communication status

0 o n

Operation transfer mode

RUN/STOP transfer

Fn60

Interval time

1.C

Setting lock mode

Set data unlock/lock transfer

0

00

1.

LOCK

Lock state

R/S

00 RUN

RUN


[Communication]

0

SCI

INT

0001 0

Set the Interval time

Setting End

1.

0 LOCK

Unlock state

00

0 oF F

0 STOP

STOP

0000 0

Set the

Communication protocol

Data bit configuration

1.C

BIT

0000 0

Set the Data bit configuration

R/S

Communication protocol

CMPS

 Next parameter is displayed.

＋

＋ MODE

(2 seconds)

1.C

Set the Device address

Communication speed

* Press the key until

Parameter setting mode is displayed.

Keep pressing without releasing your finger from the key to enter the

Setting lock mode.

Set the

Communication speed

 Press and keys simultaneously to return to the

Measured value (PV)/Set value (SV) Monitor.

(The MONI key may be pressed to return to the Measured value (PV)/Set value (SV) Monitor)

 Select RUN on the RUN/STOP transfer.

MODE

Device address

0000 0

1.C

ADD

BPS

0000 3

 Select lock on the Set data unlock/lock transfer.

3-4

IMR03D07-E1


3.2 Selection of Communication Data Type

3.2.1 Communication data type

There are such data as shown below for the communication with the computer. Communication data type can be selected at Input data type ( INdT ).

For the Input data type, refer to the 3.2.2 Description of each parameter (P. 3-6) .



RKC communication




 7 digits data, Communication data equivalent to our HA series

(RKC communication identifiers are compatible)

The RKC communication identifiers for the HA series can be used to handle the communication data of the GZ400/900 corresponding to the HA series. If there is no relevant communication data on the GZ400/900, dummy data is used.

Set value of

Input data type

0

1

2

For the data map of RKC communication, 6.3.1 GZ400/GZ900 communication data [RKC communication identifier/Modbus double word] (P. 6-12) .



Modbus


Set value of

Input data type

 Double word, Communication data of GZ400/900

For details, refer to the 6.3.1 GZ400/GZ900 communication data

[RKC communication identifier/Modbus double word] (P. 6-12) .

 Single word, Communication data of GZ400/900

For details, refer to the 6.4.1 GZ400/GZ900 communication data

[Modbus single word] (P. 6-142) .

 Single word, Communication data equivalent to our FB series

(Modbus register addresses are compatible)

The Modbus register addresses for the FB series can be used to handle the communication data of the GZ400/900 corresponding to the FB series.


For details, refer to the 6.4.4 FB series equivalent communication data


 Double word, Communication data equivalent to our HA series

(Modbus register addresses are compatible)

The Modbus register addresses for the HA series can be used to handle the communication data of the GZ400/900 corresponding to the HA series.


For details, refer to the 6.3.4 HA series equivalent communication data

[RKC communication identifier/Modbus single word] (P. 6-103) .

0

1

1

2

IMR03D07-E1

3-5


3.2.2 Description of each parameter

Communication data type can be selected at Input data type ( INdT ). The Input data type can be found in the

Function block No. 21: Input 1 ( 1. InP ) of Engineering mode.



Function block No. 21: Input 1 ( 1. InP )

No. Symbol



･

･

165

Name Description

Fn21 Function block No.

21

･

･

･

･

This is the first parameter symbol of Function block No. 21

･

･

INDT Input data type 0: Number of measured value digits: 5

Number of RKC communication data digits: 7

Modbus data: Double word

･

･

Select the input data type.

PLC communication data: Double word

(System data: Single word)

1: Number of measured value digits: 4


Modbus data: Single word *

PLC communication data: Single word

2: HA series equivalent

(Communication identifiers of RKC

communication and register address

of Modbus switch to the HA series equivalent

data.)

Number of measured value digits: 5

Number of RKC communication digits: 7

Double word

PLC communication: Double word


* Including our FB series equivalent data




･

･

Depends on the input range code specified at the time of order.

When changing the Input data type from 0 (or 2) to

1 and when the present Input range has 5 digits

(example: Input range high: 1372.0), you need to configure the Input range to have 4 digits beforehand.

The display of the time unit depends on the Input data type.

In case of Input data type 0 or 2

hour/minute/second, hour/minute,

minute/second,

In case of Input data type 1

hour/minute, minute/second, second

The communication data type can be checked at Input data type of the host communication.

Input data type

RKC communication identifier: SE

Modbus Double word:

(Refer to P. 6-50)

01A4H, 01A5H (Refer to P. 6-50)

Modbus Single word: 20D2H (Refer to P. 6-148)

3-6

IMR03D07-E1


3.2.3 Setting procedure

The Input data type can be found in the Function block No. 21: Input 1 ( 1. InP ) of Engineering mode.

Set value change and registration

 The flashing digit indicates which digit can be set. Press key to go to a different digit.

 To store a new value for the parameter, always press the key. The display changes to the next parameter and the new value will be stored. The modified data will not be stored only by operating the and keys.

 In case no operation is performed within 60 seconds after the change of the setting, the mode will return to

Monitor and SV setting mode. The modified data will not be registered in this case.



Setting procedure

To enter the Engineering mode

Monitor & SV setting mode

PV/SV monitor

0 28.0

00 0.0

Engneering mode


[Display]

Fn10 0

00 DSP

(4 seconds

MODE

(2 seconds)

Twice

* )

1.

Setting lock mode


0 LOCK

Lock state

Operation transfer mode

RUN/STOP transfer

00

Fn21

0 o n

R/S

00 RUN

RUN


[Input 1]

0

1.InP

Setting End

Several times

 Next parameter is displayed.

0 LOCK

Unlock state

00

0 oF F

R/S

0 STOP

STOP

1.

 Select RUN on the RUN/STOP transfer.

INDT

0000 0

 Select lock on the Set data unlock/lock transfer.

＋ MODE

(2 seconds)

Input data type

＋

Set the Input data type

MODE

 Press and keys simultaneously to return to the

Measured value (PV)/Set value (SV) Monitor.

(The MONI key may be pressed to return to the Measured value (PV)/Set value (SV) Monitor)

* Press the key until

Parameter setting mode is displayed.

Keep pressing without releasing your finger from the key to enter the

Setting lock mode.

IMR03D07-E1

3-7


3.3 Communication Requirements



Processing times during data send/receive

When the host computer is using either the polling or selecting procedure for communication, the following processing times are required for GZ400/900 to send data:

 Response wait time after GZ400/900 sends BCC in polling procedure

 Response wait time after GZ400/900 sends ACK or NAK in selecting procedure

Response send time is time when interval time is set at 0 ms.

RKC communication (Polling procedure) processing times

Procedure details

Response send time after GZ400/900 receives ENQ

Time

4.48 ms max.

Response send time after GZ400/900 receives ACK

Response send time after GZ400/900 receives NAK

Response send time after GZ400/900 sends BCC

4.64 ms max.

4.64 ms max.

304  s max.

RKC communication (Selecting procedure) processing times

Procedure details

Response send time after GZ400/900 receives BCC

Response wait time after GZ400/900 sends ACK

Response wait time after GZ400/900 sends NAK

Time

280 ms max.

276  s max.

276  s max.

Modbus processing times

Procedure details Time

Read holding registers [03H]

Response send time after the slave receives the query message

Preset single register [06H]


Diagnostics (loopback test) [08H]


Preset multiple registers (Write multiple registers) [10H]


14.8 ms max.

160 ms max.

14.8 ms max.

312 ms max.

3-8

IMR03D07-E1




RS-485 (2-wire system) send/receive timing (RKC communication)

RS-485 communication is conducted through two wires, therefore, the transmission and reception of data requires precise timing.

 Polling procedure

Host computer

Send data

(Possible/Impossible)

Sending status

Possible

Impossible

E

O

T

- - - - -

E

N

Q

GZ400

GZ900

Send data


Sending status

Possible

Impossible a

S

T

X

- - - - - a: Response send time after the GZ400/900 receives [ENQ] + Interval time b: Response send time after the GZ400/900 sends BCC c: Response send time after the GZ400/900 receives [ACK] + Interval time or

Response send time after the GZ400/900 receives [NAK] + Interval time

B

C

C b

A

C

K or c

N

A

K

 Selecting procedure

Host computer

Send data


Sending status

Possible

Impossible

S

T

X

- - - - -

B

C

C

GZ400

GZ900

Send data


Possible a

Sending status

Impossible

A

C

K or a: Response send time after the GZ400/900 receives BCC + Interval time b

N

A

K b: Response wait time after the GZ400/900 sends ACK or Response wait time after the

GZ400/900 sends NAK

To switch the host computer from transmission to reception, send data must be on line.

The following processing times are required for the GZ400/900 to process data:

 In polling procedure, Response wait time after the GZ400/900 sends BCC

 In selecting procedure, Response wait time after the GZ400/900 sends ACK or NAK



Fail-safe

A transmission error may occur if the transmission line is disconnected, shorted or set to the high-impedance state. In order to prevent the above error, it is recommended that the fail-safe function be provided on the receiver side of the host computer. The fail-safe function can prevent a framing error from its occurrence by making the receiver output stable to the MARK (1) when the transmission line is in the high-impedance state.

IMR03D07-E1

3-9

MEMO

RKC

COMMUNICATION

PROTOCOL

This chapter describes the RKC communication protocol.

4.1 Polling .............................................................................................. 4-2

4.1.1 Polling procedures ............................................................................... 4-3

4.1.2 Polling procedure example .................................................................. 4-7

4.2 Selecting .......................................................................................... 4-8

4.2.1 Selecting procedures ........................................................................... 4-8

4.2.2 Selecting procedure example ............................................................ 4-12

IMR03D07-E1

4-1

4. RKC COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL

The RKC communication uses the Polling/Selecting method to establish a data link. The basic procedure follows ANSI X3.28-1976 subcategories 2.5 and A4 basic mode data transmission control procedure (Fast selecting is the selecting method used in this controller).

In this chapter GZ400/900 are called controllers.

 The Polling/Selecting procedures are a centralized control method where the host computer controls the entire process. The host computer initiates all communication so the controller responds according to queries and commands from the host.

 The code used in communication is 7-bit ASCII code including transmission control characters.

The transmission control characters are EOT (04H), ENQ (05H), ACK (06H), NAK (15H), STX (02H) and ETX (03H). The figures in the parentheses indicate the corresponding hexadecimal number.

Data send/receive state (communication data monitoring and setting) of RKC communication can be checked by using the following software:

Communication Tool “PROTEM2”

The software can be downloaded from the official RKC website: https://www.rkcinst.co.jp/english/download-center/

4.1 Polling

E

O

T

(1)

Polling is the action where the host computer requests one of the connected controllers to transmit data. An example of the polling procedure is shown below:

Host computer send Controller send

Host computer send

Controller send

Host computer send

[Address] [ ] [ ID ]

(2)

Memory area number

When polling the data corresponding to the memory area

E

N

Q

E

O

T

No response

(4)

S

T

X

[ ID ]

(5)

[ Data ]

E

T

X

[ BCC ]

(3)

No

(8) response

(9)

Indefinite

Time out

E

O

T

E

O

T

(10)

A

C

K

(6)

(7)

N

A

K

ID: Identifier


4.1.1 Polling procedures

(1) Data link initialization

Host computer sends EOT to the controllers to initiate data link before polling sequence.

(2) Data sent from host computer - Polling sequence

The host computer sends the polling sequence in the following two types of formats:

 Format in which no Memory area number is specified, and

 Format in which the Memory area number is specified.

 When no Memory area number is specified

To be sent in this format for any identifier not corresponding to the memory area.

1.

3.

Address Identifier

4.

ENQ

Example:

0 1 M 1 ENQ

 When the Memory area number is specified

To be sent in this format for any identifier corresponding to the memory area.

1.

Address

K

2.

Memory area number

3.

Identifier

4.

ENQ

Example:

0 1 K S

1.

Address (2 digits)

The device address specifies the controller to be polled and each controller must have its own unique device address.

This data is a device address of the controller to be selected and must be the same as the device address set value in item 3. PARAMETER SETTING (P. 3-1) .

The polling address which transmitted a message once becomes effective so long as data link is not initialized by transmit and receive of EOT.

2.

Memory area number (3 digits)

This is the identifier to specify the Memory area number. It is expressed by K1 to K16 to each Memory area number (from 1 to 16). If the Memory area number is assigned with K0, this represents that Control area is specified.

The memory area now used for control is called Control area.

If the Memory area number is not specified when polling the identifier corresponding to the memory area, this represents that the Control area is specified.

If any identifier not corresponding to the memory area is assigned with a Memory area number, this Memory area number is ignored.

IMR03D07-E1

4-3


3.

Identifier (2 digits)

The identifier specifies the type of data that is requested from the controller. Always attach the ENQ code to the end of the identifier.

For details, refer to 6.3 RKC Communication/Modbus (Double Word) Data (P. 6-12) .

4.

ENQ

The ENQ is the transmission control character that indicates the end of the polling sequence.

The ENQ must be attached to the end of the identifier.

The host computer then must wait for a response from the controller.

(3) Data sent from the controller

If the polling sequence is received correctly, the controller sends data in the following format:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

STX Identifier Data ETX BCC

1.

STX

STX is the transmission control character which indicates the start of the text transmission (identifier and data).

2.


The identifier indicates the type of data (measured value, status and set value) sent to the host computer.


3.

Data (7 or 6 digits)

Data which is indicated by an identifier of the controller. It is expressed in decimal ASCII code including a minus sign (  ) and a decimal point. Data is not zero-suppressed.

The following items have the data length (in digits) as follows.

・ Instrument serial number monitor (Identifier RX): 10 digits

・ Model code monitor (Identifier ID): 32 digits

Memory area soak time monitor and Area soak time become the following data:

 When data range is 0 hour 00 minute 00 second to 9 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds:

Data range is 0:00:00 to 9:59:59, punctuation of time unit is expressed in colon “: (3AH).”

 When data range is 0 hour 00 minute to 99 hours 59 minutes:

Data range is 0:00 to 99:59, punctuation of time unit is expressed in colon “: (3AH).”

 When data range is 0 minute 00 second to 199 minutes 59 seconds:


 When data range is 0.00 second to 59.99 seconds:


The data length in RKC communication (7 or 6 digits) can be set at Input data type ( INdT ).


4.

ETX

ETX is a transmission control character used to indicate the end of text transmission.

4-4

IMR03D07-E1


5.

BCC

BCC (Block Check Character) detects error by using horizontal parity (even number).

Calculation method of BCC: Exclusive OR all data and characters from STX through ETX, not including STX.

Example:

STX M 1 0 0 1 0 0 . 0 ETX

4DH 31H 30H 30H 31H 30H 30H 2EH 30H 03H

BCC

Hexadecimal numbers

BCC ＝ 4DH  31H  30H  30H  31H  30H  30H  2EH  30H  03H ＝ 50H

(  : Exclusive OR )

Value of BCC becomes 50H.

(4) EOT sent from the controller (Ending data transmission from the controller)

In the following cases, the controller sends EOT to terminate the data link:

 When the specified identifier is invalid

 When there is an error in the data type

 When data is not sent from the host computer even if the data link is initialized

 When all the data has been sent

(5) No response from the controller

The controller will not respond if the polling address is not received correctly. It may be necessary for the host computer to take corrective action such as a time-out.

(6) ACK (Acknowledgment)

An acknowledgment ACK is sent by the host computer when data received is correct. When the controller receives ACK from the host computer, the controller will send any remaining data of the next identifier without additional action from the host computer.

For the identifier, refer to 6.3 RKC Communication/Modbus (Double Word) Data (P. 6-12)

When the host computer determines to terminate the data link, EOT is sent from the host computer.

.

(7) NAK (Negative acknowledge)

If the host computer does not receive correct data from the controller, it sends a negative acknowledgment

NAK to the controller. The controller will re-send the same data when NAK is received. This cycle will go on continuously until either recovery is achieved or the data link is corrected at the host computer.

IMR03D07-E1

4-5


(8) No response from host computer

When the host computer does not respond within approximately three seconds after the controller sends data, the controller sends EOT to terminate the data link. (Time out: 3 seconds)

(9) Indefinite response from host computer

The controller sends EOT to terminate the data link when the host computer response is indefinite.

(10) EOT (Data link termination)

The host computer sends EOT message when it is necessary to suspend communication with the controller or to terminate the data link due to lack of response from the controller.

4-6

IMR03D07-E1


4.1.2 Polling procedure example

(1) When the monitored items are polled

[Example: Input 1_Measured value (PV) M1]

 Normal transmission

Host computer send

E

O

T

0 0 M 1

E

N

Q

Address

Identifier

S

T

X

M 1 0 0 1 0 0 .

Identifier Data

 Error transmission

Controller send

Host computer send

E

O

T

0 0 M 1

E

N

Q

Address

Identifier

S

T

X

M 1 0 0 1 0 0

Identifier Data

Controller send

Host computer send

0

E

T

X

B

C

C

Error data

Host computer send

N

A

K

0

E

T

X

B

C

C

A

C

K

S

T

X

M 3 0 0 0 3 0 .

Identifier Data

Controller send

S

T

X

M 1 0 0 1 0 0 .

Identifier Data

Controller re-send

Host computer send

0

E

T

X

B

C

C

Host computer send

E

O

T

0

E

T

X

B

C

C

E

O

T

(2) When the items corresponding to the memory area are polled

[Example: Input 1_Set value (SV) S1]


E

O

T

Host computer send

0 0 K

Address

0 1 S 1

Identifier

E

N

Q

Memory area number


S

T

X

S 1 0 0 1 0 0

Identifier Data

Controller send

.

Host computer send

A

C

K

0

E

T

X

B

C

C

Host computer send

E

O

T

S

T

X

P 1 0 0 0 2 0 . 0

E

T

X

B

C

C

Identifier Data

Controller send

E

O

T

Host computer send

0 0 K 0 1 S 1

E

N

Q

Address Identifier

Memory area number

Error data

Host computer send

N

A

K

S

T

X

S 1 0 0 1 0 0 0

E

T

X

B

C

C

Host computer send

S

T

X

S 1 0 0 1 0 0 . 0

E

T

X

B

C

C

E

O

T

Identifier Data

Controller send

Identifier Data

Controller re-send

IMR03D07-E1

4-7


4.2 Selecting

Selecting is the action where the host computer requests one of the connected controllers to receive data. An example of the selecting procedure is shown below:

E

O

T

(1)

[Address]

(2)

Host computer send

S

T

X

[ ] [ ] [Data]

(3)

Identifier

E

T

X

[BCC]

Controller send

No response

A

C

K (4)

(6)

Host computer send

E

O

T

(7)

Memory area number

When selecting the data corresponding to the memory area

N

A

K (5)

4.2.1 Selecting procedures

(1) Data link initialization

Host computer sends EOT to the controllers to initiate data link before selecting sequence.

(2) Sending selecting address from the host computer

Host computer sends selecting address for the selecting sequence.

 Address (2 digits)

This data is a device address of the controller to be selected and must be the same as the device address set value in item 3. PARAMETER SETTING (P. 3-1) .

As long as the data link is not initialized by sending or receiving EOT, the selecting address once sent becomes valid.

4-8

IMR03D07-E1


(3) Data sent from the host computer

The host computer sends data for the selecting sequence with the following format:

 When no memory area number is specified

2.

3.



Identifier

When the memory area number is specified

1.

2.

Memory area number

Identifier

ETX

3.

For the STX, ETX and BCC, refer to 4.1 Polling (P. 4-2) .

ETX

1.

Memory area number (3 digits)

This is the identifier to specify the Memory area number. It is expressed by K1 to K16 to each Memory area number (from 1 to 16). If the Memory area number is assigned with K0 this represents that Control area is specified.

The memory area now used for control is called Control area.

If the Memory area number is not specified when selecting the identifier corresponding to the memory area, selecting is made to the memory area.

If any identifier not corresponding to the memory area is assigned with a Memory area number, this Memory area number is ignored.

2.


The identifier specifies the type of data that is requested from the controller, such as set value.


3.

Data

Data which is indicated by an identifier of the controller is expressed in decimal ASCII code including a minus sign (  ) and a decimal point. The channel number can be zero-suppressed.

The number of digits varies depending on the type of identifier. (7 or 6 digits)

Memory area soak time monitor and Area soak time become the following data:

 When data range is 0 hour 00 minute 00 second to 9 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds:

Data range is 0:00:00 to 9:59:59, punctuation of time unit is expressed in colon “: (3AH).”

 When data range is 0 hour 00 minute to 99 hours 59 minutes:


 When data range is 0 minute 00 second to 199 minutes 59 seconds:


 When data range is 0.00 second to 59.99 seconds:


In addition to above, when minute and second data are set in more than 60, become as the following:

Example: 1:65 (1 hour 65 minutes) → 2:05 (2 hours 05 minutes)

0:65 (0 minute 65 seconds) → 1:05 (1 minute 05 seconds)

The data length in RKC communication (7 or 6 digits) can be set at Input data type ( INdT ).


IMR03D07-E1

4-9


 About numerical data

Receivable data

The controller can receive zero-suppressed data and whole number data (data without decimal fraction).

<Example> For example, even if the data  1.5 is sent by the host as  001.5,  01.5,  1.5,  1.50,  1.500, the controller receives the data as  1.5.

 When the host computer sends data containing a decimal point to the item without a decimal point, the controller receives a message with the value that is cut off below the decimal point.

<Example> When setting range is 0 to 200, the controller will receive as follows:

Send data

Receive data

0.5 100.5

0 100

 The controller receives a value truncated to a specified number of decimal places. The digits smaller than that will be cut off.

<Example> When setting range is  10.00 to  10.00, the controller will receives as follows:

Send data

Receive data

 .5

 0.50





.058 .05  0

0.05 0.05 0.00

Unreceivable data

The controller sends NAK when received a following data.





.

 .

Plus sign and data with a plus sign

Only minus sign (without a number)

Only decimal point (period)

Only minus sign and a decimal point

(4) ACK (Acknowledgment)

An acknowledgment ACK is sent by the controller when data received is correct. When the host computer receives ACK from the controller, the host computer will send any remaining data. If there is no more data to be sent to the controller, the host computer sends EOT to terminate the data link.

(5) NAK (Negative acknowledge)

If the controller does not receive correct data from the host computer, it sends a negative acknowledgment

NAK to the host computer. Corrections, such as re-send, must be made at the host computer. The controller will send NAK in the following cases:

 When an error occurs on communication the line (parity, framing error, etc.)

 When a BCC check error occurs

 When the specified identifier is invalid

 When receive data exceeds the setting range

 When receive data is the identifier of RO (read only)

4-10

IMR03D07-E1


(6) No response from controller

The controller does not respond when it cannot receive the selecting address, STX, ETX or BCC.

(7) EOT (Data link termination)

The host computer sends EOT when there is no more data to be sent from the host computer or there is no response from the controller.

IMR03D07-E1

4-11


4.2.2 Selecting procedure example

(1) When the items corresponding to the Control area are selected



E

O

T

0 0

S

T

X

S

Host computer send

1 0 0 1 0

Address Identifier Data


0 . 0

E

T

X

B

C

C

A

C

K

Host computer send

S

T

X

P 1 0 0 0 2 0 . 0

E

T

X

B

C

C

Host computer send

E

O

T

Identifier

Controller send

Data

A

C

K

Controller send

E

O

T

0 0

S

T

X

S

Error data

Host computer send

1

Address Identifier

0 0 1 0

Data

0 0

E

T

X

B

C

C

N

A

K

S

T

X

Controller send

S 1

Host computer re-send

Identifier

0 0 1 0

Data

0 . 0

E

T

X

B

C

C

Host computer send

A

C

K

E

O

T

Controller send

(2) When the items corresponding to the memory area are selected



E

O

T

0 0

S

T

X

K 0

Host computer send

1 S 1 0

Address Identifier

Memory area number


0 1 0

Data

0 . 0

E

T

X

B

C

C

Host computer send

S

T

X

K 0 1 P 1 0 0 0 2 0 . 0

E

T

X

B

C

C

A

C

K

Controller send

Identifier

Memory area number

Data

Host computer send

E

O

T

A

C

K

Controller send

E

O

T

0 0

Address

S

T

X

K 0

Host computer send

1 S 1

Identifier

Memory area number

0 0 1 0

Data

Error data

0 0

E

T

X

B

C

C

S

T

X

K 0 1

Host computer re-send

S 1

N

A

K

Identifier

Memory area number

Controller send

0 0 1 0

Data

0 . 0

E

T

X

B

C

C

Host computer send

E

O

T

A

C

K

Controller send

4-12

IMR03D07-E1

MODBUS

PROTOCOL

This chapter describes the Modbus protocol.

5.1 Message Format .............................................................................. 5-2

5.2 Function Code .................................................................................. 5-3

5.3 Communication Mode ...................................................................... 5-3

5.4 Slave Responses ............................................................................. 5-4

5.5 Calculating CRC-16 ......................................................................... 5-5

5.6 Register Read and Write .................................................................. 5-8

 Read holding registers [03H] .................................................................. 5-8

 Preset single register [06H] .................................................................. 5-10

 Diagnostics (Loopback test) [08H] ........................................................ 5-11

 Preset multiple registers (Write multiple registers) [10H] ...................... 5-12

5.7 Caution for Handling Communication Data .................................... 5-13

5.8 How to Use Modbus Data Mapping ............................................... 5-15

5.9 How to Use Memory Area Data ..................................................... 5-18

5.9.1 Read and write of memory area data ................................................ 5-18

5.9.2 Control area transfer .......................................................................... 5-22

IMR03D07-E1

5-1

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

In this chapter a host computer is called Master and GZ400/900 is called Slave.

The master controls communication between master and slave. A typical message consists of a request

(query message) sent from the master followed by an answer (response message) from the slave. When master begins data transmission, a set of data is sent to the slave in a fixed sequence. When it is received, the slave decodes it, takes the necessary action, and returns data to the master.

Data send/receive state (communication data setting) of Modbus can be checked by using the following software:

Communication Tool “PROTEM2”

The software can be downloaded from the official RKC website: https://www.rkcinst.co.jp/english/download-center/

5.1 Message Format

The message consists of four parts: slave address, function code, data, and error check code which are always transmitted in the same sequence.

Slave address

Function code

Data

Error check (CRC-16)

Message format



Slave address

The slave address is a number from 1 to 99 manually set at the front key panel of the GZ400/900.

Master does not communicate with the slave when the address is set to “0.”

For details, refer to 3. PARAMETER SETTING (P. 3-1) .

Although all connected slave units receive the query message sent from the master, only the slave with the slave address coinciding with the query message will accept the message.



Function code

The function codes are the instructions set at the master and sent to the slave describing the action to be executed. The function codes are included when the slave responds to the master.

For details, refer to 5.2 Function Code (P. 5-3) .



Data

The data to execute the function specified by the function code is sent to the slave and corresponding data returned to the master from the slave.

For details, refer to 5.6 Register Read and Write (P. 5-8) and 6. COMMUNICATION DATA

LIST (P. 6-1) .



Error check

An error checking code (CRC-16: Cyclic Redundancy Check) is used to detect an error in the signal transmission.

For details, refer to 5.5 Calculating CRC-16 (P. 5-5) .

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

5.2 Function Code

Function code contents

Function code

(Hexadecimal)

03H

Function Contents

Read holding registers

06H

08H

Preset single register

Diagnostics (loopback test)

(Write multiple registers)

Measured (PV) value monitor,

Event state monitor, etc.

Set value (SV), Event set value,

PID constants, PV bias, etc.

(Write single data) loopback test

Set value (SV), Event set value,

PID constants, PV bias, etc.

(Write multiple consecutive data)

Message length of each function (Unit: byte)

Function code

(Hexadecimal)

03H

Function

Read holding registers

Query message

Response message

Min Max Min Max

8 8 5 255

08H Diagnostics (loopback test) 8 8 5 8

11 255 5 8

(Write multiple registers)

5.3 Communication Mode

Signal transmission between the master and slaves is conducted in Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) mode.

Items Contents

Data bit length

Start mark of message

End mark of message

Message length

8-bit (Binary)

Unused

Unused

Refer to 5.2 Function Code

Data time interval Less than 24-bit time *

Error check CRC-16 (Cyclic Redundancy Check)

* When sending a command message from the master, set intervals of data configuring one message to time shorter than the 24-bit time. If time intervals become time longer than the 24-bit time the relevant slave assumes that message sending from the master is terminated and there is no response.

IMR03D07-E1

5-3

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

5.4 Slave Responses

(1) Normal response

 In the response message of the Read Holding Registers, the slave returns the read out data and the number of data items with the same slave address and function code as the query message.

 In the response message of the Preset Single Register, the slave returns the same message as the query message.

 In the response message of the Diagnostics (Loopback test), the slave returns the same message as the query message.

 In the response message of the Preset Multiple Registers (Write Multiple Registers), the slave returns the slave address, the function code, starting number, and number of holding registers in the multi-query message.

(2) Defective message response

 If the query message from the master is defective, except for transmission error, the slave returns the error response message without any action.

Slave address

Function code

Error code

Error check (CRC-16)

Error response message

 If the self-diagnostic function of the slave detects an error, the slave will return an error response message to all query messages.

 The function code of each error response message is obtained by adding 80H to the function code of the query message.

Error code Contents

1

2

3

4

Function code error (An unsupported function code was specified)

 When the mismatched address is specified.

 Address other than 0000H to 00AFH is specified as the starting number.

 The maximum number (Read from a read holding resister or write to Preset multiple resisters [Write multiple registers]) has been exceeded.

 The setting of the number of data (the number of requested byte) is not set to a double of the requested number of data at the time of “Preset multiple registers

(Write multiple registers)”

Self-diagnostic error response

(3) No response

The slave ignores the query message and does not respond when:

 The slave address in the query message does not coincide with any slave address settings.

 The CRC code of the master does not coincide with that of the slave.

 Transmission error such as overrun, framing, parity etc., is found in the query message.

 Data time interval in the query message from the master exceeds 24-bit time.

5-4

IMR03D07-E1

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

5.5 Calculating CRC-16

The Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) is a 2 byte (16-bit) error check code. After constructing the data message, not including start, stop, or parity bit, the master calculates a CRC code and appends this to the end of the message. The slave will calculate a CRC code from the received message, and compare it with the

CRC code from the master. If they do not coincide, a communication error has occurred and the slave does not respond.

The CRC code is formed in the following sequence:

1.

Load FFFFH to a 16-bit CRC register.

2.

Exclusive OR (  ) the first byte (8 bits) of the message with the CRC register. Return the result to the

CRC register.

3.

Shift the CRC register 1 bit to the right.

4.

If the carry flag is 1, exclusive OR the CRC register with A001 hexadecimal and return the result to the

CRC register. If the carry flag is 0, repeat step 3 .

5.

Repeat step 3 and 4 until there have been 8 shifts.

6.

Exclusive OR the next byte (8 bits) of the message with the CRC register.

7.

Repeat step 3 through 6 for all bytes of the message (except the CRC).

8.

The CRC register contains the 2 byte CRC error code. When they are appended to the message, the low-order byte is appended first, followed by the high-order byte.

IMR03D07-E1

5-5

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL



The flow chart of CRC-16

START

FFFF H  CRC Register

CRC Register  next byte of the message  CRC Register

0  n

Shift CRC Register right 1 bit

Carry flag is 1

No

Yes

CRC Register  A001 H  CRC Register n + 1  n

No n  7

No

Yes

Is message complete?

Yes

Reverse with high-order byte and low-order byte of CRC Register

END

The  symbol indicates an exclusive OR operation. The symbol for the number of data bits is n .

5-6

IMR03D07-E1

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL



Example of a CRC calculation in the ‘C’ language

This routine assumes that the data types ‘uint16’ and ‘uint8’ exist. These are unsigned 16-bit integer (usually an ‘unsigned short int’ for most compiler types) and unsigned 8-bit integer (unsigned char). ‘z_p’ is a pointer to a Modbus message, and ‘z_messaage_length’ is its length, excluding the CRC. Note that the Modbus message will probably contain NULL characters and so normal C string handling techniques will not work. uint16 calculate_crc （ byte *z_p, unit16 z_message_length ）

}

/* CRC runs cyclic Redundancy Check Algorithm on input z_p */

/* Returns value of 16 bit CRC after completion and

/* always adds 2 crc bytes to message

*/

*/

*/ /* returns 0 if incoming message has correct CRC

{ uint16 CRC= 0xffff; uint16 next; uint16 carry; uint16 n; uint8 crch, crcl; while (z_messaage_length--) { next = (uint16) *z_p;

CRC ^= next; for (n = 0; n < 8; n++) { carry = CRC & 1;

CRC >>= 1; if (carry) {

}

CRC ^= 0xA001;

} z_p++;

} crch = CRC / 256; crcl = CRC % 256 z_p [z_messaage_length++] = crcl; z_p [z_messaage_length] = crch; return CRC;

IMR03D07-E1

5-7

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

5.6 Register Read and Write



Read holding registers [03H]

The query message specifies the starting register address and quantity of registers to be read.

The contents of the holding registers are entered in the response message as data, divided into two parts: the high-order 8-bit and the low-order 8-bit, arranged in the order of the register numbers.

Example: The contents of the four holding registers from 0000H to 0003H are the read out from slave address 2.



Double word

Query message

Slave address

Function code

Starting number

02H

03H

High 00H

Low 00H

Quantity High 00H

Low 04H

CRC-16 High 44H

Low 3AH

First holding register address

The setting must be between 1 (0001H) and 62

(003EH).

Normal response message

Slave address

Function code

Number of data

First holding register contents

02H

03H

08H

High 00H

Low 62H (Low-order word of the first data)

Next holding register contents High 00H

(High-order word of the first data) Low 00H


(Low-order word of the next data) Low 14H

Next holding register contents

(High-order word of the next data)

High 00H

Low 00H

CRC-16 High 99H

Low 51H


Slave address

80H + Function code

(+ denotes a logical add)

02H

83H

Error code 03H

CRC-16 High F1H

Low 31H

Number of holding registers  2

5-8

IMR03D07-E1

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL



Single word

Query message

Slave address

Function code

Starting number

02H

03H

High 00H

Quantity

Low 00H

High 00H

Low 04H

CRC-16 High 44H

Low 3AH


Slave address

Function code

Number of data

First holding register contents

(First data)

02H

03H

08H

High 00H

Low 62H


(Next data) Low 14H


(Next data)

Next holding register contents

Low 00H

High 00H

(Next data) Low 00H

CRC-16 High E9H

Low 56H


Slave address

80H + Function code


02H

83H

Error code 03H

CRC-16 High F1H

Low 31H


The setting must be between 1(0001H) and

125 (007DH).


IMR03D07-E1

5-9

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL



Preset single register [06H]

The query message specifies data to be written into the designated holding register. The write data is arranged in the query message with high-order 8-bit first and low-order 8-bit next.

Only R/W holding registers can be specified.

Example: Data is written into the holding register 0072H of slave address 1.

Query message

Slave address

Function code

Holding register number

01H

06H

High 00H

Low 72H

Write data High 00H

Low 01H

CRC-16 High E8H

Low 11H

Any data within the range


Slave address

Function code

Holding register number

01H

06H

High 00H

Low 72H

Write data High 00H

Low 01H

CRC-16 High E8H

Low 11H

Contents will be the same as query message data.


Slave address

80H + Function code


01H

86H

Error code 02H

CRC-16 High C3H

Low A1H

In the case of double word, writing to high-order word register only is not possible.

The attempt ends with a normal message, but the write will not be done.

5-10

IMR03D07-E1

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL



Diagnostics (Loopback test) [08H]

The master’s query message will be returned as the response message from the slave.

This function checks the communication system between the master and slave (the GZ400/900).

Example: Loopback test for slave address 1

Query message

Slave address

Function code

Test code

01H

08H

High 00H

Low 00H

Data High 1FH

Low 34H

CRC-16 High E9H

Low ECH


Slave address

Function code

01H

08H

Test code High 00H

Low 00H

Data High 1FH

Low 34H

CRC-16 High E9H

Low ECH


Slave address

80H + Function code


01H

88H

Error code 03H

CRC-16 High 06H

Low 01H

Test code must be set to “00.”

Any pertinent data

Contents will be the same as query message data.

IMR03D07-E1

5-11

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL



Preset multiple registers (Write multiple registers) [10H]

The query message specifies the starting register address and quantity of registers to be written. The write data is arranged in the query message with high-order 8-bit first and low-order 8-bit next. Only R/W holding registers can be specified.

Example: Data is written into the two holding registers from 0070H to 0071H of slave address 1.

Query message

Slave address

Function code

Starting number

Quantity

Number of data

Data to first register

01H

10H

High 00H

Low 70H

High 00H

04H

High 00H


Set a register address within the following range.

Double word: 1 to 61 (0001H to 003DH)

Single word: 1 to 123 (0001H to 007BH)


Data to next register High 00H


Slave address

Function code

01H

10H

Starting number High 00H

Quantity

Low 70H

High 00H

Low 02H

CRC-16 High 40H

Low 13H


Slave address

80H + Function code


01H

90H

Error code 02H

CRC-16 High CDH

Low C1H

5-12

IMR03D07-E1

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

5.7 Caution for Handling Communication Data

 The numeric range of data used in Modbus protocol is 0000H to FFFFH. Only the set value within the setting range is effective.

FFFFH represents  1.

 The Modbus protocol processes the data with a decimal point as the data without a decimal point during the communication.

Example 1: When Input 1_Manipulated output value monitor [heat-side] is 5.0 %, 5.0 is processed as 50,

50 = 0032H.

Input 1_Manipulated output value High 00H monitor [heat-side] Low 32H

Example 2: When Input 1_Set value (SV) is  20.0  C,  20.0 is processed as  200,

 200 = 0000H  00C8H = FF38H.

Input 1_Set value (SV) High FFH

 In our communication a variable is handled as a double word or a single word.

Switchover between the single word and the double word can be done at Input data type.


[Double word]

 The variable is handled as 4 bytes data.

 One variable use two register addresses (Address of high-order word, Address of low-order word).

 To Read/Write two-word data is implemented from the low-order word to the high-order word or from the high-order word to the low-order word.

The data transfer sequence is selectable at “Communication protocol” in the Engineering mode.

For the Communication protocol, refer to 3.1 Setting of Communication Parameter (P. 3-2) .

 There is the following constraint in writing data in order to treat the variable as 4 bytes data.

 It is not possible to write only of high-order word. The communication response becomes normal

response, but do not writing.

 A writing only of low-order word does sign extend and does it.

Example 1: When did a writing only of “0020H” in low-order word.

The controller interprets high-order word as “0000H.”

Example 2: When did a writing only of “FFFFH (  1)” in low-order word.

The controller interprets high-order word as “FFFFH.”

[Single word]

 A variable is handled as a two-byte data.

 Each variable occupies one register address.

 In this communication, the variables that memory area includes handle different address with for control area and for setting area.

IMR03D07-E1

5-13

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

 If data (holding register) exceeding the accessible address range is accessed, an error response message is returned.

 Read data of unused item is “0.”

 Any attempt to write to an unused item is not processed as an error. Data cannot be written into an unused item.

 If data range error occurs during data writing (Write Action), it is not processed as an error. Normal data is written in data register but data with error is not written; therefore, it is recommended to confirm data of changed items after the data setting.

 Communication items not existing in the product because of the specifications are handled as “0” when the data is read in. If write action to this item is performed, no error message is indicated and no data is written.

 Commands should be sent at time intervals of 24 bits after the master receives the response message.

5-14

IMR03D07-E1

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

5.8 How to Use Modbus Data Mapping

Data mapping function is a function that enables the data that needs to be constantly monitored to be mapped into the specified address area.

Up to 32 communication data can be assigned to the register address in the following table used to actually read the data from/write the data to.

Communication data allocation can be performed in “Register address specifying the mapping data.”

(HEX: Hexadecimal number DEC: Decimal number)

Register address specifying the mapping data

Register address actually read from/write to

Register address of the mappable data

HEX: 1000H to 103FH

DEC: 4096 to 4159

HEX: 1500H to 153FH

DEC: 5376 to 5439

Refer to 6.3.1 GZ400/GZ900 communication data [RKC communication identifier/Modbus double word] (P. 6-12) and 6.3.4 HA series equivalent communication data

[RKC communication identifier/

Modbus single word] (P. 6-103) .

HEX: 1000H to 101FH

DEC: 4096 to 4127

HEX: 1500H to 151FH

DEC: 5376 to 5407

Refer to 6.4.1 GZ400/GZ900 communication data [Modbus single word] (P. 6-142) and 6.4.4 FB series equivalent communication data


For the data mapping address list, refer to the 6.3.3 Data mapping address [Modbus double word] (P. 6-98) , 6.4.3 Data mapping address [Modbus single word] (P. 6-165) .

Example 1: When the data is read in double-word

Data to be mapped: Input 1_Measured value (PV), Input 1_Manipulated output value monitor Event 1 state monitor, Event 2 state monitor

Communication protocol:

1 (Modbus [Order of data transfer: high-order word to low-order word])

1.

Write 0000H to the low-order word of Register address setting 1 to 4 (see table of “Register address for data designation”). Write register address of the data to be mapped (either low-order word or high-order word) to the high-order word.

Data to be mapped

Name

Input 1_Measured value (PV)

Register address order order order order

Write 0000H to the low-order word of Register address for data designation, or

Write register address of the data

Low- High- Low- High- to be mapped (either low-order word or high-order word) to the high-order word.*

0000

Input 1_Manipulated output value monitor [heat-side] 000E

0001

000F

0

14

1

15

* There is no difference whichever data is written.

Event 1 state monitor


Register address for data designation

001C 001D 28

001E 001F 30

29

31

Register address

Name

HEX DEC

Low- order

High- order

Low- order

High- order

Setting data

Register address setting 1 [Read/write address:

Low-order word 1500H, high-order word 1501H]







IMR03D07-E1

5-15

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

The table below shows the assignment of read/write register addresses 1500H to 1507H by the above mapping.


HEX DEC

Low- order

High- order

Low- order

High- order

Name

1500 1501 5376 5377 Input 1_Measured value (PV)

1504 1505 5380 5381 Event 1 state monitor

1506 1507 5382 5383 Event 2 state monitor

2.

Reads out the mapping data by following order message.

Slave address

Function code

Starting number High

02H

03H

15H

First holding register address (1500H)

Number of data (4)

Example 2: When the data is read in a single word of data mapped.

Data to be mapped: Input 1_Measured value (PV), Input 1_Manipulated output value monitor Event 1 state monitor, Event 2 state monitor

1.

Write register addresses of mapping data to register address setting from 1 to 4 (Register address for data designation).

Data to be mapped

Name



HEX DEC address for the designation of

Input 1_Manipulated output value monitor [heat-side]

Event 1 state monitor 200E 8206

Event 2 state monitor 200F 8207

Register address for data designation

Name


Setting data

HEX DEC

Register address setting 1

[Read/write address: 1500H]







1000 4096 2000

1001 4097 2007

1002 4098 200E

1003 4099 200F

5-16

IMR03D07-E1

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

The table below shows the assignment of read/write register addresses 1500H to 1503H by the above mapping.


HEX DEC

1500 5376

Name


1501

1502

5377

5378

Input 1_Manipulated output value monitor [heat-side]


1503 5379 Event 2 state monitor

2.

Reads out the mapping data by following order message.

Slave address

Function code

Starting number High

02H

03H

15H

First holding register address (1500H)

Number of data (4)

IMR03D07-E1

5-17

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

5.9 How to Use Memory Area Data

Memory area function can store up to 16 individual sets of SVs and parameters. One of the areas is used for control, and the currently selected area is Control area.

Memory area data can be used to check and change settings that belong to memory areas other than the

Control area.

5.9.1 Read and write of memory area data

There are two types of methods for reading from and writing to the Memory area.

 Direct designation method (Double word, Single word)

The direct designation method uses register address (0500H to 0E1FH for double word or 2500H to 298FH for single word) to read data from or write data to the Memory area.

 Area designation method (Double word, Single word)

If any Memory area number to perform data read and write is specified by the Setting memory area number, data corresponding to the specified Memory area number is called up to the register addresses of memory area. This register address is used to read data from and write data to the Memory area.

The area designation method is mainly designed for the use of the data equivalent to our HA series 1 or FB series 2 .

1 The data equivalent to our HA series refers to the communication data of our HA series compatible with the GZ400/900.

2 The data equivalent to our FB series refers to the communication data of our FB series compatible with the GZ400/900.



Direct designation method (Double word, Single word)

The direct designation method uses register address (0500H to 0E1FH for double word or 2500H to 298FH for single word) to read data from or write data to the Memory area.


Memory area number

Memory area 1

Memory area 2

Register address of Memory area

Double word

HEX DEC

Low-order High-order Low-order High-order

Single word

HEX DEC

0500 0501 1280 1281 2500 9472

･

･

0590

0592

･

･

0622

0624

･

0591

0593

･

0623

0625

･

1424

1426

･

1570

1572

･

1425

1427

･

1571

1573

･

2548

2549

･

2591

2592

･

9544

9545

･

9617

9618

Memory area 3

･

06B4

06B6

06B5

06B7

1716

1718

1717

1719

25DA

25DB

9690

9691

Memory area 4

Memory area 5

･

0746

0748

･

･

･

07D8

0747

0749

･

･

･

07D9

1862

1864

･

･

･

2008

1863

1865

･

･

･

2009

2623

2624

･

･

･

266C

9763

9764

･

･

･

9836

5-18

IMR03D07-E1

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

Memory area number

Memory area 6

Memory area 7

Memory area 8

Memory area 9

Memory area 10

Memory area 11

Memory area 12

Memory area 13

Memory area 14

Memory area 15

Memory area 16

Register address of Memory area

Double word

HEX DEC

Low-order High-order Low-order High-order

Single word

HEX DEC

0C6A

･

･

･

0CFA

0CFC

･

･

･

0D8C

0D8E

･

･

･

0E1E

0B46

･

･

･

0BD6

0BD8

･

･

･

0C68

0A22

･

･

･

0AB2

0AB4

･

･

･

0B44

08FE

･

･

098E

0990

･

･

0A20

07DA

･

･

086A

086C

･

･

08FC

07DB

･

086B

086D

･

08FD

08FF

･

098F

0991

･

0CFD

･

･

･

0D8D

0D8F

･

･

･

0E1F

0BD9

･

･

･

0C69

0C6B

･

･

･

0CFB

0A21

0A23

･

･

･

0AB3

0AB5

･

･

･

0B45

0B47

･

･

･

0BD7

2010

･

2154

2156

･

2300

2302

･

2446

2448

･

2592

2594

･

･

･

2738

2740

･

･

･

2884

2886

･

･

･

3030

3032

･

･

3176

3178

･

･

3322

3324

･

･

3468

3470

･

･

3614

2011

･

2155

2157

･

2301

2303

･

2447

2449

･

2593

2595

･

･

･

2739

2741

･

･

･

2885

2887

･

･

･

3031

3033

･

･

3177

3179

･

･

3323

3325

･

･

3469

3471

･

･

3615

266D

･

26B5

26B6

･

26FE

26FF

･

2747

2748

･

9837

･

9909

9910

･

9982

9983

･

10055

10056

･

28FE

･

･

･

2946

2947

･

･

･

298F

286C

･

･

･

28B4

28B5

･

･

･

28FD

2790

2791

･

･

･

27D9

27DA

･

･

･

2822

2823

･

･

･

286B

10494

･

･

･

10566

10567

･

･

･

10639

10348

･

･

･

10420

10421

･

･

･

10493

10128

10129

･

･

･

10201

10202

･

･

･

10274

10275

･

･

･

10347

For the memory area data list, refer to the 6.3.2 Memory area data (Direct designation method)

[Modbus double word] (P. 6-80), 6.4.2 Memory area data (Direct designation method) [Modbus single word] (P. 6-152) .

The memory area data is used in three groups for the Level PID. For details of Level PID, refer to the GZ400/GZ900 Instruction Manual [Part 2: Parameters/Functions] (IMR03D05-E  ) .

IMR03D07-E1

5-19

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL



Area designation method (Double word, Single word)

If any Memory area number to perform data read and write is specified by the Setting memory area number, data corresponding to the specified Memory area number is called up to the register addresses of memory area. This register address is used to read data from and write data to the Memory area.

The area designation method is mainly designed for the use of the data equivalent to our HA series 1 or FB series 2 .

1 The data equivalent to our HA series refers to the communication data of our HA series compatible with the GZ400/900.

2 The data equivalent to our FB series refers to the communication data of our FB series compatible with the GZ400/900.


Setting memory area number

(Register address designating the memory area.)

Register address of memory area data

(Register address for data read and data write.)

The data equivalent to our HA series

Double word

HEX: 0500H, 0501H

DEC: 1280, 1281

The data equivalent to our FB series

Single word

HEX: 0500H

DEC: 1280

The data equivalent to our HA series

Double word

HEX: 0502H to 0535H

DEC: 1282 to 1333

The data equivalent to our FB series

Single word

HEX: 0501H to 055EH

DEC: 1281 to 1374

For the memory area data list, refer to the 6.3.5 HA series equivalent memory area data (Area designation method) [Modbus double word] (P. 6-137) and 6.4.5 Memory area data equivalent to the FB series (Area designation method) [Modbus single word] (P. 6-180) .

 Double word

Memory area 2

Memory area 16

Memory area 1

A memory area number which data is read/written is written to the register address,

Low-order: 0500H

High-order: 0501H.

Data corresponding to a specified Memory area number is called up to the register addresses from

0502H to 0535H.

HEX

Name Low- order

Hogh- order

Event 1 set value (EV1)

Event 1 set value (EV1) [high]





Input 1_Control loop break alarm (LBA) time

Input 1_LBA deadband (LBD)




0502H 0503H

0504H 0505H

0506H 0507H

0508H 0509H

050AH 050BH

050CH 050DH

050EH 050FH


Input 1_Set value (SV)

0510H 0511H

0512H 0513H

Input 1_Proportional band [heat-side] 0514H 0515H

･

･

･

･

･

･

Link area number 0534H 0535H

5-20

IMR03D07-E1

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

Example 1: When data on the Event 1 set value (EV1) in Memory area 2 is read

1.

The Memory area number, “2” is written to the Setting memory area number (Low-order word: 0500H,

High-order word: 0501H). Data in Memory area 2 is called up to the register addresses from 0502H to

0535H.

2.

Data on Event 1 set values (EV1) (Low-order word: 0500H, High-order word: 0501H) is read.

Example 2: When the Input 1_Set value (SV) in Memory area 3 is changed to 200

1.

The Memory area number, “3” is written to the Setting memory area number (Low-order word: 0500H,

High-order word: 0501H). Data in Memory area 3 is called up to the register addresses from 0502H to

0535H.

2.

“200” is written to the Set value (SV) (Low-order word: 0512H, High-order word: 0513H).

 Single word

Memory area 2

Memory area 16

Memory area 1

A memory area number which data is read/written is written to the register address, 0500H.


0501H to 055EH.

Name HEX










0501H

0502H

0503H

0504H

0505H



0506H

0507H

Input 1_Proportional band [heat-side] 0508H

Input 1_Integral time [heat-side]

Input 1_Derivative time [heat-side]

0509H

050AH

Input 1_Integral time [heat-side] 050BH

Input 1_Proportional band [cool-side] 050CH

Input 1_Integral time [cool-side]

･

･

050DH

･

･

Input 2_Knee point correction value 5 055EH

Example 1: When data on the Event 1 set value (EV1) in Memory area 2 is read

1.

The Memory area number, “2” is written to the Setting memory area number (0500H).

Data in Memory area 2 is called up to the register addresses from 0501H to 055EH.

2.

Data on Event 1 set values (EV1) (0501H) is read.

Example 2: When the Input 1_Set value (SV) in Memory area 3 is changed to 200

1.

The Memory area number, “3” is written to the Setting memory area number (0500H).

Data in Memory area 3 is called up to the register addresses from 0501H to 055EH.

2.

“200” is written to the Set value (SV) (0507H).

IMR03D07-E1

5-21

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

5.9.2 Control area transfer

Any memory area used for control is specified by the Memory area transfer. The area now used for control is called Control area.


Double word Single word

Memory area transfer

 GZ400/900 communication data

HEX: Low-order word: 0064H

High-order 0065H

DEC: Low-order word: 100 word:

 HA series equivalent communication data *

HEX: Low-order word: 003CH

High-order 003DH

DEC: Low-order word: 60


HEX: 2032H

DEC: 8242

 FB series equivalent communication data **

HEX: 0024H

DEC: 0036

Control area

(Area now used for control)


HEX: 007EH to 010FH

DEC: 126 to 271

 HA series equivalent communication data *

HEX: 003EH to 0071H, 02A2H, 02A3H,

02A4H, 02A5H, 02BCH, 02BDH,

02BFH

DEC: 62 to 113, 674, 675, 676, 677, 700,


HEX: 203FH to 2087H

DEC: 8255 to 8327

 FB series equivalent communication data **

HEX: 0026H to 0039H, 00A5H, 00A6H,

00AAH

DEC: 0038 to 0057, 0165, 0166, 0169, 0170

* The data equivalent to our HA series refers to the communication data of our HA series compatible with the GZ400/900.

** The data equivalent to our FB series refers to the communication data of our FB series compatible with the GZ400/900.

For the control area data list, refer to the 6.3.1 GZ400/GZ900 communication data [RKC communication identifier/Modbus double word] (P. 6-12) , 6.3.4 HA series equivalent communication data [RKC communication identifier/ Modbus double word] (P. 6-103), 6.4.1

GZ400/GZ900 communication data [Modbus single word] (P. 6-142) and 6.4.4 FB series equivalent communication data [Modbus single word] (P. 6-169) .

The Memory area number (Control area) can be changed at either RUN or STOP.

 GZ400/900 communication data (Double word)

Memory area 2

Memory area 1

5-22

Memory area 16

Write the Memory area No. used for the control to register address.

Write into

Low-order word: 0064H

High-order word: 0065H


007EH to 010FH

Name



Set value (SV) of differential temperature input


Event 1 set value (EV1’) [low]





･

･

Input 2_Knee point correction value 5

HEX

Low- order

007E

High- order

007F

0080 0081

0082 0083

0084

0086

0085

0087

0088 0089

008A 008B

008C 008D

008E

･

･

010E

008F

･

･

010F

IMR03D07-E1

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

Example: When performing control by calling up data in Memory area 3 (Double word)

1.

The Memory area number, “3” is written to the Memory area transfer (Low-order word: 0064H

High-order word: 0065H).

Data in Memory area 3 is called up to the register addresses from 007EH to 010FH.

2.

Control is performed by using data in the register addresses from 007EH to 010FH.

 HA series equivalent communication data (Double word)


003EH to 0071H, 02A2H, 02A3H, 02A4H,

02A5H, 02BCH, 02BDH, 02BEH, 02BFH

Memory area 16

Memory area 2

Memory area 1


Write into

Low-order word: 003CH

High-order word: 003DH

Name










･

･

Input 2_Setting limiter high

Input 2_Setting limiter low

HEX

Low- order

High- order

003E

0040

0042

003F

0041

0043

0044 0045

0046 0047

0048 0049

004A 004B

004C 004D

004E

･

･

004F

･

･

02BC 02BD

02BE 02BF

Example: When performing control by calling up data in Memory area 3 (Double word)

1.

The Memory area number, “3” is written to the Memory area transfer (Low-order word: 003CH

High-order word: 003DH).

Data in Memory area 3 is called up to the register addresses from 003EH to 0071H, 02A2H, 02A3H,

02A4H, 02A5H, 02BCH, 02BDH, 02BEH, and 02BFH.

2.

Control is performed by using data in the register addresses from 003EH to 0071H, 02A2H, 02A3H,

02A4H, 02A5H, 02BCH, 02BDH, 02BEH, and 02BFH.

IMR03D07-E1

5-23

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

 GZ400/900 communication data (Single word)

Memory area 2

Memory area 16

Memory area 1

A memory area number which data is read/written is written to the register address, 2032H.


203FH to 2087H.

Name HEX









203FH

2040H

2041H

2042H

2043H

2044H

2045H

2046H



2047H

2048H

Event 4 set value (EV3’) [low] 2049H

･

･

･

･

Input 2_Knee point correction value 5 2087H

Example: When performing control by calling up data in Memory area 3 (Single word)

1.

The Memory area number, “3” is written to the Memory area transfer (2032H).

Data in Memory area 3 is called up to the register addresses from 203FH to 2087H.

2.

Control is performed by using data in the register addresses from 203FH to 2087H.

5-24

IMR03D07-E1

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

 FB series equivalent communication data (Single word)

Memory area 2

Memory area 16

Memory area 1


203FH to 2087H, 0026H to 0039H, 00A5H, 00A6H,

00A9H and 00AAH.

GZ400/900 communication data

Name HEX


Write into 0024H.








･

･


FB series equivalent communication data

203FH

2040H

2041H

2042H

2043H

2044H

2045H

･

･

2087H

Name HEX





0026H

0027H



0028H



0029H

Input 1_Control loop break alarm (LBA) time 002AH



Input 1_Proportional band [heat-side]




Input 1_Proportional band [cool-side]


002BH

002CH

002DH

002EH

002FH

0030H

0031H

0032H

Input 1_Derivative time [cool-side]

Input 1_Overlap/Deadband

Input 1_Manual reset

Input 1_Setting change rate limiter (up)

0033H

0034H

0035H

0036H

Input 1_Setting change rate limiter (down) 0037H

Area soak time 0038H

Link area number

Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side]

0039H

00A5H

Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side]

Input 1_Output limiter high [cool-side]

Input 1_Output limiter low [cool-side]

00A6H

00A9H

00AAH

The FB series equivalent communication data [retrieved to the control area of Modbus single word] may be overlapped with the communication data of the GZ400/900 retrieved to the control area of

[Modbus single word], but not all of the data in the Memory area will be retrieved into the Control area of FB series equivalent communication data [Modbus single word]. To use all o the data in the

Memory area for control, use the control area (203FH to 2087H) of GZ400/900 communication data

[Modbus single word].

IMR03D07-E1

5-25

5. MODBUS PROTOCOL

Example: When performing control by calling up data in Memory area 3 (Single word)

1.

The Memory area number, “3” is written to the Memory area transfer (0024H).

The data in Memory area 3 will be retrieved into register addresses 0026H to 0039H, 00A5H, 00A6H,

00A9H, 00AAH, and 0041H to 0073H.

2.

Control will be conducted using the data in register addresses 0026H to 0039H, 00A5H, 00A6H,

00A9H, 00AAH and 0041H to 0073H.

If the Memory area transfer (0024H) and the Setting memory area number (0500H) are set to the same Memory area number, the respective data can be synchronized.

 Values in the Control areas (0026H to 0039H, 00A5H, 00A6H, 00A9H, 00AAH and 0041H to

0073H) become the same as those in the memory areas (0501H to 055EH).

 If data in the control area is changed, data in the memory area is also changed.

 If data in the memory area is changed, data in the control area is also changed.

5-26

IMR03D07-E1

COMMUNICATION

DATA LIST

This chapter describes communication data.

6.1 Data Map Structure .......................................................................... 6-2

6.1.1 Structure of RKC Communication/Modbus (Double Word) data map .............. 6-2

6.1.2 Structure of Modbus (Single Word) data map .................................................. 6-4

6.1.3 Structure of HA series equivalent communication data map ............................ 6-5

6.2 How to Read the Table ................................................................... 6-6

 Data map of RKC communication identifiers/Modbus double word .................... 6-6

 Data map of Modbus single word ........................................................................ 6-8

 Data map of HA series equivalent communication ............................................. 6-9

 Data map of FB series equivalent communication ............................................ 6-11

6.3 RKC Communication/Modbus (Double Word) Data ....................... 6-12

6.3.1 GZ400/GZ900 Communication data

[RKC communication identifier/Modbus double word] ................................... 6-12

6.3.2 Memory area data (Direct designation method) [Modbus double word] ......... 6-80

6.3.3 Data mapping address [Modbus double word] ............................................... 6-98

6.3.4 HA series equivalent communication data

[RKC communication identifier/ Modbus double word] ................................ 6-103

6.3.5 HA series equivalent memory area data (Area designation method)

6.4 Modbus (Single Word) Data ......................................................... 6-142

6.4.1 GZ400/GZ900 communication data [Modbus single word] .......................... 6-142

6.4.2 Memory area data (Direct designation method) [Modbus single word] ........ 6-152

6.4.3 Data mapping address [Modbus single word] .............................................. 6-165

6.4.4 FB series equivalent communication data [Modbus single word]................. 6-169

6.4.5 Memory area data equivalent to the FB series (Area designation method)

IMR03D07-E1

6-1

6. COMMUNICATION DATA LIST

6.1 Data Map Structure

This chapter contains two types of data maps.

 RKC Communication/Modbus (Double Word) data map

 Modbus (Single word) data map

 HA series equivalent communication data map

The data length in RKC communication (7 or 6 digits), the communication data type in Modbus (single word/double word) or HA series equivalent communication data can be set at Input data type ( INdT ).

For the Input data type, refer to the 3.2 Selection of Communication Data Type (P. 3-5) .

6.1.1 Structure of RKC Communication/Modbus (Double Word) data map

This part describes identifiers in RKC communication and register addresses in Modbus data (double word).

The structure of RKC communication/Modbus (double word) is as follows.




Monitor items

The separator position of the continuous [ACK] polling.

Setting items


For compatibility of identifiers with other models (dummy data)




Modbus (Double word)


HEX DEC

Low- order

High- order

Low- order

High- order

･

･

016E

･

･

02F6

･

･

016F

･

･

02F7

0

･

366

･

･

758

1

･

367

･

･

759

HEX: Hexadecimal number DEC: Decimal number

Contents

Data of GZ400/900 (Normal setting data)

Refer to 6.3.1 GZ400/GZ900 Communication data

[RKC communication identifier/ Modbus double word] (P. 6-12) .

Data of GZ400/900 (Data in the Engineering mode)

Refer to 6.3.1 GZ/400/GZ900 Communication data

[RKC communication identifier/ Modbus double word ] (P. 6-12) .

･

･

04FE

･

･

04FF

･

･

1278

･

･

1279

Unused

･

･

0E1E

･

･

0E1F

･

･

3614

･

･

3615

Memory area data of GZ400/900

Refer to 6.3.2 Memory area data (Direct designation method) [Modbus double word] (P. 6-80) .

･

･

0FFE

･

･

0FFF

･

･

4094

･

･

4095

Unused

･

･

103E

･

･

103F

･

･

4158

･

･

4159

Mapping setting of GZ400/900 (32)

Refer to  Register address for data designation of 6.3.3 Data mapping address [Modbus double word] (P. 6-98) .

･

･

14FE

･

･

14FF

･

･

5374

･

･

5375

Unused

･

･

153E

･

･

153F

･

･

5438

･

･

5439

Mapping data of GZ400/900 (32)

Refer to  Register address for data read/write of 6.3.3 Data mapping address [Modbus double word] (P. 6-101) .

For the Data mapping, refer to the 5.8 How to Use Modbus Data Mapping (P. 5-15) .

For the M emory area, refer to the 5.9 How to Use Memory Area Data (P. 5-18) .

IMR03D07-E1

6-3


6.1.2 Structure of Modbus (Single Word) data map

This part describes register addresses of Modbus data (single word). The structure of the data map of

Modbus (single word) is as follows.

HEX: Hexadecimal number DEC: Decimal number


HEX DEC

･

･

00E0

0

･

224

Communication data equivalent to our FB series

Refer to word] (P. 6-169) .

Contents

* (address compatible)

6.4.4 FB series equivalent communication data [Modbus single

･

･

04FF

･

･

055E

･

･

1279

･

･

1374

Unused

Memory area data equivalent to our FB series * (address compatible)

Refer to 6.4.5 Memory area data equivalent to the FB series (Area designation method) [Modbus single word] (P. 6-180) .

･

･

0FFF

･

･

101F

･

･

4095

･

･

4127

Unused

Mapping setting of GZ400/900 (32)

Up to 16 for FB series equivalent

Refer to  Register address for data designation of 6.4.3 Data mapping address [Modbus single word] (P. 6-165) .

･

･

14FF

･

･

151F

･

･

5375

･

･

5407

Unused


Up to 16 for FB series equivalent

Refer to  Register address for data read/write of 6.4.3 Data mapping address [Modbus single word] (P. 6-167) .

･

･

1FFF

･

･

8191

Unused

･

･

20B7

･

･

217B

･

･

8375

･

･

8571

Data of GZ400/900 (Normal setting data items)

Refer to 6.4.1 GZ400/GZ900 communication data [Modbus single word]

(P. 6-142) .

Data of GZ400/900 (Data in the Engineering mode)

Refer to 6.4.1 GZ400/GZ900 communication data [Modbus single word]

(P. 6-142) .

･

･

24FF

･

･

9471

Unused

･

･

298F

･

･

10639

Memory area data of GZ400/900

Refer to 6.4.2 Memory area data (Direct designation method) [Modbus single word] (P. 6-152) .

* The communication identifiers of GZ400/900 equivalent to our FB series can be used.




6-4

IMR03D07-E1


6.1.3 Structure of HA series equivalent communication data map

This part describes identifiers of the HA series equivalent RKC communication data and register address of

MODBUS data (double word). The data map structure of RKC communication/Modbus (double word) is as follows.




Monitor items


Setting items


For compatibility of identifiers with other models (dummy data)



Modbus (Double word)

･

･

02FA


HEX DEC

Low- order

High- order

･

･

02FB

Low- order

0

･

762

High- order

1

･

763

Contents

Communication data equivalent to our HA series * (address compatible)

Refer to 6.3.4 HA series equivalent communication data [RKC communication identifier/ Modbus double word] (P. 6-103) .

･

･

04FE

･

･

0534

･

･

04FF

･

･

0535

･

･

1278

･

･

1332

･

･

1279

･

･

1333

Unused

Memory area data equivalent to our HA series * (address compatible)

Refer to 6.3.5 HA series equivalent memory area data (Area designation method) [Modbus double word] (P. 6-137) .

･

･

0FFE

･

･

103E

･

･

0FFF

･

･

103F

･

･

4094

･

･

4158

･

･

4095

･

･

4159

Unused


Refer to  Register address for data designation of 6.3.3 Data mapping address [Modbus double word] (P. 6-98) .

･

･

14FE

･

･

153E

･

･

14FF

･

･

153F

･

･

5374

･

･

5438

･

･

5375

･

･

5439

Unused


Refer to  Register address for data read/write of 6.3.3 Data mapping address [Modbus double word] (P. 6-101) .

* The communication identifiers of GZ400/900 equivalent to our HA series can be used.




IMR03D07-E1

6-5


6.2 How to Read the Table



Data map of RKC communication identifiers/Modbus double word

This part describes how to read the data map of 6.3.1 GZ400/GZ900 Communication data [RKC communication identifier/Modbus double word] (P. 6-12) .

(1) (2) (8)

No. Name

1

2


Input 1_Set value (SV) monitor

(1) No.:

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC

Low-order High-order Low-order High-order

M1 7 or 6 0000 0001 0 1

MS 7 or 6 0002 0003 2 3

Data range

RO Input 1_Input range low  (Input 1_5 % of input span or more) to Input 1_Input range high  (Input 1_5 % of input span or more)

[Varies with the setting of the Decimal point position.]

RO Input 1_Setting limiter low to Input 1_Setting limiter high


Communication data number

Factory set value





(2) Name:

(3) Identifier:

Communication data name

Identifier for RKC communication

(4) Digits: Number of digits for RKC communication

(5) Register address: Register address for Modbus communication


(6) Attribute: A method of how communication data items are read or written when viewed from the host computer is described.

RO: Read only data

Data direction

Host computer GZ400/900

R/W: Read and Write data

Host computer

Data direction

GZ400/900

(7) Data range: Read or write range of communication data

 ASCII code data (RKC communication)

(7 digits) (6 digits)

Most significant digit

………… Least significant digit


……… Least significant digit

The data length in RKC communication (7 or 6 digits) can be set at Input data type ( INdT ) (P. 3-6).

 16-bit data (Modbus)

Bit 15

…………….……………………

Bit 0

(8) Factory set value: Factory set value of communication data

6-6

IMR03D07-E1


In the data range and the factory set value some unfamiliar expressions are used. These are used for

Control with PV select and can be rephrased as follows:

PV select input span as Input span

PV select input range high as Input range high

PV select input range low as Input range low

The setting range is as follows.

 PV select input range high: Input range high of Input 1 and Input 2, whichever is larger

 PV select input range low: Input range low of Input 1 and Input 2, whichever is smaller

 PV select input span: PV select input range low up to PV select input range high

[Example] When there is a relation as follows between the Input range of Input 1 and Input 2.

Input 1_

Input range low

Input 1_Input range

Input 1_

Input range high

PV select input range low

Input 2_

Input range low

Input 2_Input range

PV select input span

Input 2_

Input range high

PV select input range high

The communication data include “Normal setting data,” “Data in the Engineering mode,” “Data of identifiers compatible with other models (dummy data).”

Normal setting data:

Data in the Engineering mode:

No. 1 to 187

No. 188 to 383

Data of identifiers compatible with other models (dummy data): No. 384 to 389

The attribute of the data in the Engineering mode is RO (read only) during RUN (control).

Communication data in the Engineering mode should be set according to the application before setting any parameter related to operation. Once the communication data in the

Engineering mode are set correctly, no further changes need to be made to parameters for the same application under normal conditions. If they are changed unnecessarily, it may result in malfunction or failure of the instrument. RKC will not bear any responsibility for malfunction or failure as a result of improper changes in the Engineering mode.

Communication data in Engineering mode are settable only when the controller is in STOP mod e. However, only checking can be made even in the RUN state.

IMR03D07-E1

6-7




Data map of Modbus single word

This part describes how to read the data map of 6.4.1 GZ400/GZ900 communication data [Modbus single word] (P. 6-142) .

(1) (2)

Register address 6.3.1

No.

Name

1 Input 1_Measured value (PV) 2000 8192 1

(1) No.:

(2) Name:

2 Input 1_Set value (SV) monitor



2001 8193 2



(4) 6.3.1 Reference No.: Refer to 6.3.1 GZ400/GZ900 Communication data [RKC communication identifier/Modbus double word] (P. 6-12) for communication data numbers.

Find the same number in the data map 6.3.1 GZ400/GZ900 Communication data [RKC communication identifier/Modbus double word] , and use the attribute, the data range and the factory set value obtained there.

No. Name

1

2



Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


M1 7 or 6 0000 0001 0 1

MS 7 or 6 0002 0003 2 3

Data range





Factory set value





The communication data include “Normal setting data,” “Data in the Engineering mode,” “Data of identifiers compatible with other models (dummy data).”

Normal setting data: No. 1 to 184

Data in the Engineering mode: No. 185 to 380





6-8

IMR03D07-E1




Data map of HA series equivalent communication

This part describes how to read the data map of 6.3.4 HA series equivalent communication data [RKC communication identifier/ Modbus double word] (P. 6-103) .

(1) (2) (8)

No. Name

1 Input 1_Measured value (PV)

[Input 1_measured value (PV1) monitor]



(1) No.:

(2) Name:

M1

M0

Digits

7

7

Register address

HEX DEC


0000 0001 0 1

0002 0003 2 3

Data range





Factory set value







[ ]: Name of HA series communication data

(3) Identifier:

(4) Digits:

Identifier for RKC communication

Number of digits for RKC communication



(6) Attribute: A method of how communication data items are read or written when viewed from the host computer is described.

RO: Read only data

Data direction

Host computer GZ400/900

R/W: Read and Write data

Host computer

Data direction

(7) Data range: Read or write range of communication data

 ASCII code data (RKC communication)

(7 digits)


………… Least significant digit

 16-bit data (Modbus)

Bit 15

…………….……………………

Bit 0

(8) Factory set value: Factory set value of communication data

GZ400/900

IMR03D07-E1

6-9


The communication data include “Normal setting data” and “Data in the Engineering mode.”

Normal setting data: No. 1 to 71, 153, 154, 160, 161, 166, 167, 173, 174, 200, 202

Data in the Engineering mode: No. 72 to 152, 155 to 159, 162 to 165, 168 to 172, 175 to 199,





6-10

IMR03D07-E1




Data map of FB series equivalent communication

This part describes how to read the data map of 6.4.4 FB series equivalent communication data [Modbus single word] (P. 6-169) .

(1) (2)

No.

Data equivalent to our FB series:

1 Measured value (PV)

Relevant data of GZ400/900:


2 Current transformer 1 (CT1) input value monitor

(1) No.:

Current transformer 1 (CT1) input value monitor


HEX

0000

DEC

0

6.3.1

Reference No.

1

0001 1 11

(2) Name: Communication data name


The communication data of our FB series compatible with the data of

GZ400/900.


The data of GZ400/900 equivalent to the communication data of our FB series.



(4) 6.3.1 Reference No.: Refer to 6.3.1 GZ400/GZ900 Communication data [RKC communication identifier/Modbus double word] (P. 6-12) for communication data numbers.

Find the same number in the data map factory set value obtained there.

6.3.1 GZ400/GZ900 Communication data [RKC communication identifier/Modbus double word] , and use the attribute, the data range and the

No. Name



M1

MS

Digits

7 or 6

7 or 6

Register address

HEX DEC


0000

0002

0001

0003

0

2

1

3

Data range





Factory set value





IMR03D07-E1

6-11

6.3 RKC Communication/Modbus (Double Word) Data

6.3.1 GZ400/GZ900 Communication data [RKC communication identifier/Modbus double word]

The following table shows communication identifiers of RKC communication and double word register address of Modbus.

In case of Input data type “0,” Modbus double word.



No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range



M1 7 or 6 0000 0001 0 1




5 PV select Measured value (PV)

MS 7 or 6 0002 0003

M0 7 or 6 0004 0005

MT 7 or 6 0006 0007

L3 7 or 6 0008 0009

2

4

6

8

3

5

7

9









RO When controlling with Input 1:

Input 1_Input range low  (Input 1_5 % of input span or more)

to Input 1_Input range high  (Input 1_5 % of input span or more)

When controlling with Input 2:

Input 2_Input range low  (Input 2_5 % of input span or more)

to Input 2_Input range high  (Input 2_5 % of input span or more)


Factory set value











No. Name

6 Measured value (PV) of differential temperature input

L2

LE

O1

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


7 000A 000B 10 11

6  

7 or 6 000C 000D

7 or 6 000E 000F



12

14



13

15

Data range

RO In case of Input data type 0 or 2

 19999 to  99999


RO In case of Input data type 1

 1999 to  9999


RO  (Input 1_Input span) to  (Input 1_Input span)


RO  5.0 to  105.0 %

7 Set value (SV) monitor of differential temperature input

8 Input 1_Manipulated output value monitor [heat-side]

9 Input 1_Manipulated output value monitor [cool-side]

10 Input 2_Manipulated output value monitor



O2

O0

M3

M4

7 or 6 0010

7 or 6 0012

7 or 6 0014

7 or 6 0016

0011

0013

0015

0017

16

18

20

22

17

19

21

23

RO

RO





5.0 to

5.0 to





105.0 %

105.0 %

RO 0.0 to 100.0 A

RO 0.0 to 100.0 A

Factory set value

















No. Name

13 Memory area soak time monitor

14 Remote setting input value monitor

TR

S2

Digits

7

6

Register address

HEX DEC


0018 0019 24 25

 

7 or 6 001A 001B



26



27

Data range

RO In case of Input data type 0 or 2

 RKC communication

0 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds to 9 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds *

0 hours 00 minutes to 99 hours 59 minutes

0 minutes 00 seconds to 199 minutes 59 seconds

0.00 seconds to 59.99 seconds

(Calculation is performed every 50 ms.)

 Modbus

0 to 35999 seconds

0 to 11999 seconds

0 to 5999 minutes

0 to 5999 seconds (10 ms)


[Data range of Memory area soak time monitor can be selected on the Soak time unit.]

RO In case of Input data type 1






 Modbus (Single word only)

0 to 5999 minutes

0 to 11999 seconds






Factory set value







No. Name

15 Event 1 state monitor

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


AA 7 or 6 001C 001D 28 29 RO 0: OFF

1: ON




19 Heater break alarm 1 (HBA1) state monitor


21 Control loop break alarm 1

(LBA1) state monitor

22 Control loop break alarm 2

(LBA2) state monitor

AB 7 or 6 001E 001F 30

AG

AH

AC

AD

AE

AF

7 or 6 0020

7 or 6 0022

7 or 6 0024

7 or 6 0026

7 or 6 0028

0021

0023

0025

0027

0029

7 or 6 002A 002B

32

34

36

38

40

42

31

33

35

37

39

41

43

RO 0: OFF

1: ON

RO 0: OFF

1: ON

RO 0: OFF

1: ON

RO 0: OFF

1: ON

RO 0: OFF

1: ON

RO 0: OFF

1: ON

RO 0: OFF

1: ON

Data range Factory set value

















24 Input 1_Burnout state monitor


No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


AJ 7 or 6 002C 002D 44 45 RO 0 to 4095

B1

B0

7 or 6 002E

7 or 6 0030

002F

0031

46

48

47

49

Data range

 1: Event 1

 2: Event 2

 4: Event 3

 8: Event 4

 16: Heater break alarm 1 (HBA1)


 64: Control loop break alarm 1 (LBA1)


 256: Input 1_Input error high

 512: Input 1_Input error low



When multiple items are applicable, they are summed up.

RO 0: OFF

1: ON

RO 0: OFF

1: ON

Factory set value







No. Name

26 DI state monitor

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


L1 7 or 6 0032 0033 50 51

Data range

RO RKC communication

The DI state is assigned as a bit image in binary numbers.

Bit 0: DI1

Bit 1: DI2

Bit 2: DI3

Bit 3: DI4

Bit 4: DI5

Bit 5: DI6

Bit 6 to Bit 7: Unused

Data 0: Open 1: Closed

Modbus

0 to 63

 1: DI1 Closed

 2: DI2 Closed

 4: DI3 Closed

 8: DI4 Closed

 16: DI5 Closed

 32: DI6 Closed


Factory set value





No. Name

27 OUT state monitor

28 DO state monitor

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


Q1 7 or 6 0034 0035 52 53

Q2 7 or 6 0036 0037 54 55

Data range


The OUT state is assigned as a bit image in binary numbers.

Bit 0: OUT1

Bit 1: OUT2

Bit 2: OUT3


Data 0: OFF 1: ON

Modbus

0 to 7

OFF

 1: OUT1 ON

 2: OUT2 ON

 4: OUT3 ON



The DO state is assigned as a bit image in binary numbers.

Bit 0: DO1

Bit 1: DO2

Bit 2: DO3

Bit 3 DO4


Data 0: OFF 1: ON

Modbus

0 to 15

OFF

 1: DO1 ON

 2: DO2 ON

 4: DO3 ON

 8: DO4 ON


Factory set value









No. Name

29 Overall operation status

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


L0 7 or 6 0038 0039 56 57 RO 0 to 511

30 Input 1_PID memory


32 Input 1_Peak hold monitor

33 Input 1_Bottom hold monitor


PC

PD

HQ

FQ

HR

7 or 6 003A 003B

7 or 6 003C 003D

7 or 6 003E

7 or 6 0040

7 or 6 0042

003F

0041

0043

58

60

62

64

66

59

61

63

65

67

Data range

 1: STOP state

 2: Input 1_Manual mode state


 8: Remote mode state

( Differential temperature control state,

Input 2 state of Control with PV select)

 16: Input 1_Autotuning (AT) state


 64: Set value of Input 1 is now changing


 256: Communication monitoring result


RO Switching by Memory area number: 1 to 16

Switching by Set value (SV): 1 to 8

Switching by Measured value (PV): 1 to 8

[Which PID memory can be used depends on the setting of the

Input 1_Level PID action selection.]

RO Switching by Memory area number: 1 to 16

Switching by Set value (SV): 1 to 8

Switching by Measured value (PV): 1 to 8

[Which PID memory can be used depends on the setting of the

Input 2_Level PID action selection.]

RO Input 1_Input range low  (Input 1_5 % of input span) to Input 1_Input range high  (Input 1_5 % of input span)






Factory set value













No. Name

35 Input 2_Bottom hold monitor

36 Input 1_AT remaining time monitor

37 Input 2_AT remaining time monitor

38 Input 1_AT/ST status monitor

39 Input 2_AT/ST status monitor

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


FR 7 or 6 0044 0045 68 69

AN

AO

AP

AQ

ER

7 or 6 0046

7 or 6 0048

0047

0049

7 or 6 004A 004B

7 or 6 004C 004D

7 or 6 004E 004F

70

72

74

76

78

71

73

75

77

79

Data range





Modbus

0 to 2880 minutes



Modbus

0 to 2880 minutes

RO  4 to  2

AT/ST

 1: AT running now

 2: ST running now

 1: Aborted. Setting changed.

 2: Aborted. Abnormal input.

 3: Aborted. Timeout.

 4: Aborted. Abnormal calculated values.

RO  4 to  2

AT/ST

 1: AT running now

 2: ST running now

 1: Aborted. Setting changed.

 2: Aborted. Abnormal input.

 3: Aborted. Timeout.

 4: Aborted. Abnormal calculated values.

RO 0 to 71

Normal

 1: Adjustment data error

 2: Data back-up error

 4: A/D conversion error

(Temperature compensation error included)

 64: Display units error


Factory set value

















No. Name

41 Integrated operating time

42 Peak hold monitor of ambient temperature

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


UT 7 or 6 0050 0051 80 81 RO 0 to 65535 hours

HP 7 or 6 0052 0053 82 83 RO  120 to  120  C

Data range

VR 7 or 6     RO

44 Model code monitor

45 Instrument number monitor decimal point position decimal point position decimal point position

ID

RX

32

10

    RO

    RO

  0054 0055 84 85 RO 0: No decimal place

1: One decimal place

2: Two decimal place

3: Three decimal place

4: Four decimal place

When the type of retransmission output is as follows:

Varies with the setting of the Input 1_Decimal point position.

  0056 0057 86 87 RO

No retransmission output Remote setting input value

Input 1_Measured value (PV) Input 1_SV monitor value

Input 1_Local SV Input 1_Deviation

Measured value (PV) of differential temperature input



Input 2_Measured value (PV) Input 2_SV monitor value

Input 2_Local SV Input 2_Deviation

  0058 0059 88 89 RO


1 (One decimal place)

Input 1_Manipulated output value [heat-side]

Input 1_Manipulated output value [cool-side]

Input 2_Manipulated output value

Current transformer 1 (CT1) input value

Current transformer 2 (CT2) input value

Factory set value

















No. Name

49 Event 1 decimal point position




Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


  005A 005B 90 91 RO 0: No decimal place


3: Three decimal places

4: Four decimal places

2: Two decimal places

  005C 005D 92 93 RO

When the event type is No event, Deviation, Process, or SV:

  005E 005F 94 95 RO

For Input 1, differential temperature input:


For Input 2:


  0060 0061 96 97 RO

When the Event type is Manipulated output value:

1 (One decimal place)

54 Memory area transfer

55 Input 1_Hold reset


57 Bottom suppression start signal

IL 7 or 6 0062 0063 98 99 R/W 0: Interlock release

1: Interlock state

“1: Interlock state” is for monitoring the interlocked state. Do not write “1.”

ZA 7 or 6 0064 0065 100 101 R/W 1 to 16

When the DI1 function selection is set to “Memory area transfer

(Without area set signal)” and when “External mode” is selected with the Control area Local/External transfer, the data is RO

(Read only).

CQ 7 or 6 0066 0067 102 103 R/W 0: Hold

1: Reset

Returns to Hold state automatically after reset.

CR 7 or 6 0068 0069 104 105 R/W 0: Hold

1: Reset

Returns to Hold state automatically after reset.

S8 7 or 6 006A 006B 106 107 R/W 0 to 3

0: No forced ON

 1: Input 1_Bottom suppression action Forced ON

 2: Input 2_Bottom suppression action_Forced ON

SR 7 or 6 006C 006D 108 109 R/W 0: RUN (Control start)

1: STOP (Control stop)

Factory set value









0

1

0

0

0

0

No. Name

59 Input 1_Autotuning (AT)


61 Input 1_Startup tuning (ST)


Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


G1 7 or 6 006E 006F 110 111 R/W 0: PID control

1: Start Autotuning

When the Autotuning (AT) is finished, the control will automatically return to “0.”

G0 7 or 6 0070 0071 112 113 R/W 0: PID control

1: Start Autotuning


ST 7 or 6 0072 0073 114 115 R/W 0: ST unused

1: Execute once *

2: Execute always

* When the ST is finished, the control will automatically return to “0.”

SZ 7 or 6 0074 0075 116 117 R/W 0: ST unused

1: Execute once *

2: Execute always

* When the ST is finished, the control will automatically return to “0.”

J1 7 or 6 0076 0077 118 119 R/W 0: Auto mode

1: Manual mode

J0 7 or 6 0078 0079 120 121 R/W 0: Auto mode

1: Manual mode

63 Input 1_Auto/Manual transfer


Factory set value

0

0

0

0

0

0

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


66 Control area Local/External

67 Input 1_Set value (SV)

68 Input 2_Set value (SV) transfer

69 Set value (SV) of differential temperature input

★

★

C1 7 or 6 007A 007B 122 123 R/W When Select function for input 2 is: “Remote setting input”

0: Local mode

1: Remote mode

When Select function for input 2 is: “Control with PV select”

0: Input 1

1: Input 2

When “Switching by level” is selected at “Selection of PV select trigger,” the parameter becomes RO (Read only).

When Select function for input 2 is: “2-loop control/Differential temperature control”

0: 2-loop control

1: Differential temperature control

E1 7 or 6 007C 007D 124 125 R/W 0: Local mode

1: External mode

S1 7 or 6 007E 007F 126 127 R/W Input 1_Setting limiter low to Input 1_Setting limiter high


S0 7 or 6 0080 0081 128 129 R/W Input 2_Setting limiter low to Input 2_Setting limiter high


S3 7 or 6 0082

★

★ Parameters which can be used in multi-memory area function

0083 130 131 R/W  (Input 1_Input span) to  (Input 1_Input span)


Factory set value

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

No. Name

70 Event 1 set value (EV1)

When Event 1 type is either high or low limit with individual setting


★

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


A1 7 or 6 0084 0085 132 133 R/W  Deviation

When assigned to Input 1 or Differential temperature input

 (Input 1_Input span) to  (Input 1_Input span)

When assigned to Input 2


When Control with PV select is selected at Select function for input 2

 (PV select input span) to  (PV select input span)


 Input value or Set value


Input 1_Input range low to Input 1_Input range high



When assigned to Differential temperature input



PV select input range low to PV select input range high


 Manipulated output value

 5.0 to  105.0 %


Factory set value

TC/RTD inputs:

10

V/I inputs:

5 % of input span

50.0

No. Name

71 Event 1 set value (EV1') [low]


★

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


BT 7 or 6 0086 0087 134 135 R/W  Deviation

When assigned to Input_1 or Differential temperature input

 (Input 1_Input span) to  ( Input 1_Input span)



When Control with PV select is selected at Select function for

Input 2










When Control with PV select is selected at Select function for

Input 2



A2 7 or 6 0088 0089 136 137 R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1)/Event 1 set value (EV1) [high]


Event 2 set value (EV2) [high] ★

73 Event 2 set value (EV2’) [low]

★


BU 7 or 6 008A 008B 138 139 R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1’) [low]

A7 7 or 6 008C 008D 140 141 R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1)/Event 1 set value (EV1) [high]




Factory set value

TC/RTD inputs:

 10

V/I inputs:

 5 % of input span

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


BV 7 or 6 008E 008F 142 143 R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1’) [low] 75 Event 3 set value (EV3’) [low]

★

76 Event 4 set value (EV4) A8 7 or 6 0090 0091 144 145 R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1)/Event 1 set value (EV1) [high]


★

78 Input 1_Proportional band

[heat-side]



[heat-side]

80 Input 1_Derivative time

[heat-side]

★

★

★

BW 7 or 6 0092 0093 146 147 R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1’) [low]

P1 7 or 6 0094 0095 148 149 R/W TC/RTD inputs

0 (0.0, 0.00) to Input 1_Input span (Unit:  C [  F])

(When Control with PV select: 0 to PV select input span)


Voltage (V)/Current (I) inputs

0.0 to 1000.0 % of Input 1_Input span

(When Control with PV select: 0.0 to 1000.0 % of PV select input span)

0 (0.0, 0.00): ON/OFF action

I1 7 or 6 0096 0097 150 151 R/W PID control or Heat/Cool PID control

0 to 3600 seconds, 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds,

0.00 to 360.00 seconds or 0.000 to 36.000 seconds

0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PD action

[Varies with the setting of the Integral/Derivative time decimal point position.]

D1 7 or 6 0098 0099 152 153 R/W 0 to 3600 seconds, 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds,

0.00 to 360.00 seconds or or 0.000 to 36.000 seconds

0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PI action



Factory set value

TC/RTD inputs:

30

V/I inputs:

3.0

240.00

60.00

No. Name

82 Input 1_Proactive intensity parameter

★

★

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


CA 7 or 6 009A 009B 154 155 R/W 0: Slow 1: Medium 2: Fast

[When the P or PD action is selected, this setting becomes invalid]

ZP 7 or 6 009C 009D 156 157 R/W 0 to 4

0: No function

MR 7 or 6 009E 009F 158 159 R/W  100.0 to  100.0 %

84 Input 1_FF amount

★

★

85 Input 1_Output limiter high

[heat-side] ★

86 Input 1_Output limiter low

[heat-side] ★

87 Input 1_Control loop break alarm

(LBA) time ★

F3

OH

OX

A5

7 or 6 00A0 00A1

7 or 6 00A2 00A3

7 or 6 00A4 00A5

7 or 6 00A6 00A7

160

162

164

166

161

163

165

167

R/W  100.0 to  100.0 %

R/W Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] to 105.0 %

R/W  5.0 % to Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side]

R/W 0 to 7200 seconds

0: No function

88 Input 1_LBA deadband (LBD)


★

★

V3 7 or 6 00A8 00A9 168 169 R/W 0 to Input 1_Input span



P0 7 or 6 00AA 00AB 170 171 R/W TC/RTD inputs





0 (0.0, 0.00): ON/OFF action


Factory set value

PID control:

0

Heat/Cool PID control:

2

2

0.0

0.0

105.0

 5.0

LBA function is specified: 480

LBA function is not specified: 0

0

TC/RTD inputs:

30

V/I inputs:

3.0

No. Name


93 Input 2_Proactive intensity parameter

★

★

★

★

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


I0 7 or 6 00AC 00AD 172 173 R/W 0 to 3600 seconds, 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds, 0.00 to 360.00 seconds or

0.000 to 36.000 seconds

0 (0.0, 0.00,0.000): PD action


D3 7 or 6 00AE 00AF 174 175 R/W 0 to 3600 seconds, 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds, 0.00 to 360.00 seconds or

0.000 to 36.000 seconds

0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PI action


C8 7 or 6 00B0 00B1 176 177 R/W 0: Slow 1: Medium 2: Fast


ZQ 7 or 6 00B2 00B3 178 179 R/W 0 to 4

0: No function

MQ 7 or 6 00B4 00B5 180 181 R/W  100.0 to  100.0 %




★

★

★

★


(LBA) time ★

F4

OO

OS

A9

7 or 6 00B6 00B7

7 or 6 00B8 00B9

7 or 6 00BA 00BB

7 or 6 00BC 00BD

182

184

186

188

183

185

187

189

R/W  100.0 to  100.0 %

R/W Input 2_Output limiter low to 105.0 %

R/W  5.0 % to Input 2_Output limiter high


0: No function

Factory set value

240.00

60.00

0

2

0.0

0.0

105.0

 5.0




No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range



★


[cool-side]

101 Input 1_Integral time [cool-side]


[cool-side]

★

★

★

V4 7 or 6 00BE 00BF 190 191 R/W 0 to Input 2_Input span


P2 7 or 6 00C0 00C1 192 193 R/W TC/RTD inputs







I2 7 or 6 00C2 00C3 194 195 R/W 0 to 3600 seconds, 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds, 0.00 to 360.00 seconds or

0.000 to 36.000 seconds

0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PD action


D2 7 or 6 00C4 00C5 196 197 R/W 0 to 3600 seconds, 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds, 0.00 to 360.00 seconds or

0.000 to 36.000 seconds

0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PI action


★

V1 7 or 6 00C6 00C7 198 199 R/W TC/RTD inputs


When Control with PV select:


(Unit:  C [  F])



 100.0 to  100.0 % of Input 1_Input span


 100.0 to  100.0 % of PV select input span

Minus (  ) setting results in Overlap. However, the overlapping range is within the proportional range.


Factory set value

0

TC/RTD inputs:

30

V/I inputs:

3.0

240.00

60.00

TC/RTD inputs:

0

V/I inputs:

0.0

No. Name


[cool-side] ★

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


OL 7 or 6 00C8 00C9 200 201 R/W Heat/Cool PID control

Input 1_Output limiter low [cool-side] to 105.0 %

Input 1_Output limiter low

[heat-side] ★

PID control

 5.0 % to Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side]

Same data as RKC communication identifier OX

OY 7 or 6 00CA 00CB 202 203 R/W  5.0 % to Input 1_Output limiter high [cool-side] 105 Input 1_Output limiter low

[cool-side]

106 Select Trigger type for Memory area transfer

★

★

EY 7 or 6 00CC 00CD 204 205 R/W 0 to 63

 1: Event 1

 2: Event 2

 4: Event 3

 8: Event 4

 16: Digital input 1 (DI1) Close edge

 32: Digital input 1 (DI1) Open edge

To select two or more functions, sum each value.


Factory set value

105.0

 5.0

 5.0

0

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


107 Area soak time

★

TM 7 00CE 00CF 206 207 R/W In case of Input data type 0 or 2


0 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds to 9 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds





 Modbus

0 to 35999 seconds 0 to 11999 seconds

0 to 5999 minutes

0 to 5999 (10 ms) (Calculation is performed every 50 ms.)

[Data range of Area soak time can be selected on the Soak time unit.]

6     R/W In case of Input data type 1







0 to 5999 minutes 0 to 11999 seconds



LP 7 or 6 00D0 00D1 208 209 R/W 0 to 16

0: No function

109 Input 1_Setting change rate limiter (up)

110 Input 1_Setting change rate limiter (down)

★

★

★

HH 7 or 6 00D2 00D3 210 211 R/W 0 to Input 1_Input span


0: No function


HL 7 or 6 00D4 00D5 212 213 R/W 0 to Input 1_Input span


0: No function



Factory set value

RKC communication:

0:00

(0.00 seconds)

Modbus:

0

RKC communication:

0:00

(0.00 seconds)

Modbus:

0

0

0

0

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


111 Input 1_Auto/Manual transfer selection (Area)


★

★

112 Input 1_Manipulated output value

(Area)



★

★

★

J2 7 or 6 00D6 00D7 214 215 R/W 0: No transfer

1: Auto mode (bumpless)

2: Auto mode (bump)

3: Manual mode (bumpless)

4: Manual mode (bump)

O8 7 or 6 00D8 00D9 216 217 R/W PID control

 5.0 to +105.0 %

Heat/Cool PID control

 105.0 to +105.0 %

HX 7 or 6 00DA 00DB 218 219 R/W 0 to Input 2_Input span

0: No function


HY 7 or 6 00DC 00DD 220 221 R/W 0 to Input 2_Input span

0: No function


J3 7 or 6 00DE 00DF 222 223 R/W 0: No transfer


2: Auto mode (bump)



O9 7 or 6 00E0 00E1 224 225 R/W  5.0 to  105.0 % 116 Input 2_Manipulated output value

(Area)

★


Factory set value

0

PID control:  5.0


0.0

0

0

0

 5.0

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


117 Remote/Local transfer selection

(Area)

★

C2 7 or 6 00E2 00E3 226 227 R/W When Select function for input 2 is: “Remote setting input”

0: No transfer

1: Local mode

2: Remote mode


0: No transfer

1: Input 1

2: Input 2


0: No transfer

1: 2-loop control


YJ 7 or 6 00E4 00E5 228 229 R/W 0 to 5

0: Input knee point correction function is disabled

118 Input 1_Number of knee point

★

119 Input 1_Knee point input value 1

★


★


★


★

JA

JB

JC

JD

7 or 6 00E6 00E7

7 or 6 00E8 00E9

7 or 6 00EA 00EB

7 or 6 00EC 00ED

230

232

234

236

231

233

235

237

R/W Input 1_Input range low to Input 1_Input range high


R/W Same as Input 1_Knee point input value 1




★

JE 7 or 6 00EE 00EF


238 239 R/W Same as Input 1_Knee point input value 1

Factory set value

0

5

Input 1_Input range high

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


124 Input 1_Knee point correction value 1

★

UA 7 or 6 00F0 00F1 240 241 R/W Deviation setting:

 (Input 1_Knee point correction limit value) to  (Input 1_Knee point correction limit value)

Direct setting:



UB 7 or 6 00F2 00F3 242 243 R/W Same as Input 1_Knee point correction value 1 125 Input 1_Knee point correction value 2

★


★


★

UC

UD

7 or 6 00F4

7 or 6 00F6

00F5

00F7

244

246

245

247

R/W Same as Input 1_Knee point correction value 1



★


★


★


★


★

UE

YK

JK

JL

JM

7 or 6 00F8

7 or 6 0100


00F9

7 or 6 00FA 00FB

7 or 6 00FC 00FD

7 or 6 00FE 00FF

0101

248

250

252

254

256

249

251

253

255

257


R/W 0 to 5






Factory set value

Deviation setting:

0

Direct setting:


5


No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


★


★


★

JN

JO


7 or 6 0102

7 or 6 0104

0103

0105

258

260

259

261



UK 7 or 6 0106 0107 262 263 R/W Deviation setting:


Direct setting:




★

UL 7 or 6 0108 0109 264 265 R/W Same as Input 2_Knee point correction value 1


★


★


★

140 Display update cycle

UM

UN

UO

7 or 6 010A 010B

7 or 6 010C 010D

7 or 6 010E 010F

266

268

270

267

269

271




141 Input 1_PV bias

HE 7 or 6 0110 0111 272 273 R/W 1: 50 ms

2: 100 ms

3: 150 ms

4: 200 ms

5: 250 ms

6: 300 ms

7: 350 ms

8: 400 ms

9: 450 ms

10: 500 ms

PB 7 or 6 0112 0113 274 275 R/W  (Input 1_Input span) to  (Input 1_Input span)





Factory set value

Deviation setting:

0

Direct setting:


1

0

No. Name

142 Input 1_PV digital filter

143 Input 1_PV ratio

144 Input 1_PV low input cut-off

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


F1 7 or 6 0114 0115 276 277 R/W 0.00 to 10.00 seconds

0.00: Filter OFF

PR 7 or 6 0116 0117 278 279 R/W 0.500 to 1.500

145 Input 2_PV bias


(RS bias)


(RS digital filter)

147 Input 2_PV ratio

(RS ratio)

Data range

DP 7 or 6 0118 0119 280 281 R/W 0.00 to 25.00 % of Input 1_Input span


RB 7 or 6 011A 011B 282 283 R/W  (Input 2_Input span) to  (Input 2_Input span)


RS bias is selected by selecting “Remote setting input” at Select function for input 2.

F2 7 or 6 011C 011D 284 285 R/W 0.00 to 10.00 seconds

0.00: Filter OFF

RS digital filter is selected by selecting “Remote setting input” at

Select function for input 2.

RR 7 or 6 011E 011F 286 287 R/W Input 2_PV ratio

0.500 to 1.500

RS ratio

0.001 to 9.999

RS ratio is selected by selecting “Remote setting input” at Select function for input 2.

DS 7 or 6 0120 0121 288 289 R/W 0.00 to 25.00 % of Input 2_Input span

Factory set value

0.00

1.000

0.00

0

0.00

1.000

0.00

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


T0 7 or 6 0122 0123 290 291 R/W 0.1 to 100.0 seconds


149 OUT1 proportional cycle time

150 OUT2 proportional cycle time T1 7 or 6 0124 0125 292 293 R/W 0.1 to 100.0 seconds

Relay contact output:

20.0

Voltage pulse output,

Transistor output:

Note1


20.0


Transistor output:

Note2

Voltage pulse output:

Note3

0


152 OUT1 minimum ON/OFF time of proportional cycle



T2

OP

OQ

OR

7 or 6 0126

7 or 6 0128

0127

0129

7 or 6 012A 012B

7 or 6 012C 012D

294

296

298

300

295

297

299

301

R/W 0.1 to 100.0 seconds

R/W 0 to 1000 ms

R/W 0 to 1000 ms

R/W 0 to 1000 ms

0

0

Note1: In case OUT1 function selection is “Input 1_Control output [cool-side]” and Input 1_Control action is “Brilliant II Heat/Cool PID control [air cooling] or [water cooling]”: 20.0

Other cases: 2.0


Other cases: 2.0


Other cases: 2.0

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


Data range

155 Heater break alarm 1 (HBA1) set value

156 Number of heater break alarm 1

(HBA1) delay times



(HBA2) delay times

A3

TH

A4

TI

7 or 6 012E

7 or 6 0130

7 or 6 0132

7 or 6 0134

012F

0131

0133

0135

302

304

306

308

303

305

307

309

R/W 0.0 to 100.0 A

0.0: HBA function OFF

R/W 0 to 255 times

R/W 0.0 to 100.0 A


R/W 0 to 255 times output value

ON 7 or 6 0136 0137 310 311 R/W PID control

Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] to Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side]

Heat/Cool PID control *

 (Input 1_Output limiter high [cool-side]) to +(Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side])

* In case of Heat/Cool PID control, the data range has such exceptional conditions as shown below.

(1) Input 1_Output limiter high [cool-side] is  0.0 %

 Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] is  0.0 %: 0.0 % to +(Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side])

 Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] is  0.0 %: Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] to Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side]

(2) Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side] is  0.0 %

 Input 1_Output limiter low [cool-side] is  0.0 %:  (Input 1_Output limiter high [cool-side]) to 0.0 %

 Input 1_Output limiter low [cool-side] is  0.0 %:  (Input 1_Output limiter high [cool-side]) to  (Input 1_Output limiter low [cool-side])

(3) Fixed at 0.0% in the following cases: Input 1_Output limiter high [cool-side]  0.0 %, and Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side]  0.0 %

Factory set value

0.0

5

0.0

5



0.0

No. Name

160 Input 1_Level PID setting 1 *

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


Q4 7 or 6 0138 0139 312 313 R/W Input 1_Input range low to Input 1_Input range high







Q5

Q6

Q7

7 or 6 013A 013B

7 or 6 013C 013D

7 or 6 013E 013F

314

316

318

315

317

319

R/W Same as Input 1_Level PID setting 1





Q8

Q9

7 or 6 0140

7 or 6 0142

0141

0143

320

322

321

323



166 Input 1_Level PID setting 7 * QA 7 or 6 0144 0145 324 325 R/W Same as Input 1_Level PID setting 1

* Level PID settings 1 to 7 of Input 1 always maintain the following relation.

(Input 1_Level PID setting 1)  (Input 1_Level PID setting 2)  (Input 1_Level PID setting 3)  (Input 1_Level PID setting 4)  (Input 1_Level PID setting 5) 

(Input 1_Level PID setting 6)  (Input 1_Level PID setting 7)

Factory set value

Input 1_

Input range high

When Control with

PV select: PV select input range high

Same as Input 1_

Level PID setting 1

Same as Input 1_Level

PID setting 1


PID setting 1


PID setting 1


PID setting 1


PID setting 1

No. Name

167 Input 1_ON/OFF action differential gap

168 Input 1_ON/OFF action differential gap (upper)

169 Input 1_ON/OFF action differential gap (lower)

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


MH 7 or 6 0146 0147 326 327 R/W TC/RTD inputs







IV 7 or 6 0148 0149 328 329 R/W TC/RTD inputs







IW 7 or 6 014A 014B 330 331 R/W TC/RTD inputs







OM 7 or 6 014C 014D 332 333 R/W Input 2_ Output limiter low to Input 2_Output limiter high output value

Factory set value

TC/RTD inputs:

2

V/I inputs:

0.2

TC/RTD inputs:

1

V/I inputs:

0.1

TC/RTD inputs:

1

V/I inputs:

0.1

 5.0

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range








QB

QC

QD

QE

QF

QG

QH


7 or 6 014E

7 or 6 0150

7 or 6 0152

7 or 6 0154

7 or 6 0156

7 or 6 0158

014F

0151

0153

0155

0157

0159

7 or 6 015A 015B

334

336

338

340

342

344

346

335

337

339

341

343

345

347









* Level PID settings 1 to 7 of Input 2 always maintain the following relation.

(Input 2_Level PID setting 1)  (Input 2_Level PID setting 2)  (Input 2_Level PID setting 3)  (Input 2_Level PID setting 4)  (Input 2_Level PID setting 5) 

(Input 2_Level PID setting 6)  (Input 2_Level PID setting 7)

Factory set value



PID setting 1


PID setting 1


PID setting 1


PID setting 1


PID setting 1


PID setting 1

No. Name




181 Input 1_AT bias

182 Input 2_AT bias

183 FF amount learning

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


MG 7 or 6 015C 015D 348 349 R/W TC/RTD inputs:



Voltage (V)/Current (I) inputs:


IX 7 or 6 015E 015F 350 351 R/W TC/RTD inputs:





IY 7 or 6 0160 0161 352 353 R/W TC/RTD inputs:





GB 7 or 6 0162 0163 354 355 R/W  (Input 1_Input span) to  (Input 1_Input span)




GA 7 or 6 0164 0165 356 357 R/W  (Input 2_Input span) to  (Input 2_Input span)


G7 7 or 6 0166 0167 358 359 R/W 0 to 3

No

 1: Learn Input 1

 2: Learn Input 2


Factory set value

TC/RTD inputs:

2

V/I inputs:

0.2

TC/RTD inputs:

1

V/I inputs:

0.1

TC/RTD inputs:

1

V/I inputs:

0.1

0

0

0

No. Name

184 Input 1_Determination point of

185 Input 2_Determination point of external disturbance

186 PV select transfer level

187 PV select transfer time external disturbance

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


G8 7 or 6 0168 0169 360 361 R/W  (Input 1_Input span) to  (Input 1_Input span)




G9 7 or 6 016A 016B 362 363 R/W  (Input 2_Input span) to  (Input 2_Input span)


L8 7 or 6 016C 016D 364 365 R/W Input 1_Input range low to Input 1_Input range high


L9 7 or 6 016E 016F 366 367 R/W 0.0 to 100.0 seconds

Factory set value

 1

 1

Input 1_

Input range high

0.0

Items 188 to 383 are data in the Engineering mode.

Communication data the Engineering mode should be set according to the application before setting any parameter related to operation. Once the communication data in the Engineering mode are set correctly, no further changes need to be made to parameters for the same application under normal conditions. If they are changed unnecessarily, it may result in malfunction or failure of the instrument. RKC will not bear any responsibility for malfunction or failure as a result of improper changes in the

Engineering mode.

Parameters in Engineering mode are settable only when the controller is in STOP mode. However, only checking can be made even in the

RUN state.

Register address

Factory set value No. Name

188 STOP display selection

189 ALM lamp lighting condition

Digits HEX DEC


Data range

DX 7 or 6 0170 0171 368 369 R/W 0: Stop on PV display

1: Stop on SV display

2: Stop on MV display

LY 7 or 6 0172 0173 370 371 R/W 0 to 4095

OFF

 1: Event 1

 2: Event 2

 4: Event 3

 8: Event 4










1

255

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


190 PV flashing display at input error

191 Show/Hide Input 1_SV

DU

H8

7 or 6 0174

7 or 6 0176

0175

0177

372

374

373

375

R/W 0: Flashing display

1: Non-flashing display

R/W 0: Hide Input 1_SV

1: Show Input 1_SV


193 Show/Hide Input 1_MV

HN 7 or 6 0178 0179 376 377 R/W 0: Hide Input 2_SV

1: Show Input 2_SV


H9 7 or 6 017A 017B 378 379 R/W 0: Hide

1: Show Input 1_Manipulated output value (MV)

2: Show Memory area soak time

3: Show Current transformer 1 (CT1) input value


HO 7 or 6 017C 017D 380 381 R/W 0: Hide

1: Show Input 2_Manipulated output value (MV)

2: Show Memory area soak time



195 Select hide items in Monitor mode LN 7 or 6 017E 017F 382 383 R/W 0 to 31

Show

 1: Remote setting input value monitor

 2: Manipulated output value (MV) monitor

 4: Current transformer (CT) input value monitor

 8: Comprehensive event state

 16: Memory area soak time


Factory set value

1

1

0

1

1

0

No. Name

196 Select hide items in Operation transfer mode

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


LM 7 or 6 0180 0181 384 385 R/W 0 to 63

Show

 1: RUN/STOP transfer

 2: Autotuning (AT)

 4: Startup tuning (ST)

 8: Auto/Manual transfer

 16: Remote/Local transfer

(PV select transfer,

2-loop control/Differential temperature control)

 32: Control area Local/External transfer


KN 7 or 6 0182 0183 386 387 R/W 0: SET key method

Used to register the Set value (SV) using the SET key.

1: Direct registration

Used to register the Set value (SV) without pressing the SET

key.

FK 7 or 6 0184 0185 388 389 R/W 0: Unused

1: RUN/STOP transfer

2: Autotuning (AT) (Common to Input 1 and 2)

3: Input 1_Autotuning (AT)


5: Auto/Manual transfer (Common to Input 1 and 2)

6: Input 1_Auto/Manual transfer


8: Remote/Local transfer



9: Control area Local/External transfer

10: Interlock release

11: Hold reset (Common to Input 1 and 2)

12: Input 1_Hold reset


14: Set data Unlock/Lock transfer

15: Area jump

Factory set value

0

0

1

No. Name

199 FUNC key operation selection

200 Input 1_Input type

202 Input 1_Decimal point position

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


FL 7 or 6 0186 0187 390 391 R/W 0: Press once

The function set at “FUNC key assignment” is activated upon

a press of the FUNC key.

1: Press and hold

The function set at “FUNC key assignment” is activated by

holding the FUNC key pressed.

XI 7 or 6 0188 0189 392 393 R/W 0: TC input K

1: TC input J

2: TC input R

3: TC input S

13: RTD input Pt100

14: RTD input JPt100

15: Current input 0 to 20 mA DC


4: TC input B

5: TC input E

6: TC input N 19: Voltage input 1 to 5 V DC

7: TC input T 20: Voltage input 0 to 1 V DC

8: TC input W5Re/W26Re 21: Voltage input  10 to  10 V DC

9: TC input PLII 22: Voltage input  5 to  5 V DC

10: TC input U

11: TC input L

23: Voltage input 0 to 100 mV DC


12: TC input PR40-20

17: Voltage input 0 to 10 V DC


PU 7 or 6 018A 018B 394 395 R/W 0:  C

1:  F

XU 7 or 6 018C 018D 396 397 R/W 0: No decimal place





TC input:

W5Re/W26Re, PR40-20: 0 (fixed)

Thermocouples other than those shown above: 0 or 1

RTD input: 0 to 2


In case of Input data type 0 or 2: 0 to 4

In case of Input data type 1: 0 to 3


Decimal point position setting of Input 1 and Input 2 is compared and the smaller will be used.

Factory set value

0

Same as the input type of the input range code specified at the time of order.

Same as the display unit of the input range code specified at the time of order.

Same as the decimal point position of the input range code specified at the time of order.

For V/I inputs: 1

No. Name

203 Input 1_Input range high

204 Input 1_Input range low

205 Input 1_Input error determination point (high)

206 Input 1_Input error determination point (low) compensation calculation

208 Input 1_Burnout direction

209 Input 1_Selection of knee point function

210 Input 1_Selection of correction value setting

211 Input 1_Knee point correction limit value

XV

XW

AV

Digits HEX DEC


7 or 6 018E

7 or 6 0190

7 or 6 0192

Register address

018F

0191

0193

398

400

402

399

401

403

R/W (Input 1_Input range low 

Data range

1 digit) to Input 1_Maximum value of input range


R/W Input 1_Minimum value of input range to (Input 1_Input range high to Input 1_Input range high 

 1 digit)


R/W Input 1_Input error determination point (low)

(Input 1_5 % of input span)


AW 7 or 6 0194 0195 404 405 R/W Input 1_Input range low  (Input 1_5 % of input span) * to Input 1_Input error determination point (high)


* When Input type of Input 1 is RTD, low limit value is about

2 Ohms. (Pt100:  245.5  C [  409.8  F], JPt100:  237.6  C

[  395.7  F])

R0 7 or 6 0196 0197 406 407 R/W 0: No temperature compensation calculation

1: With temperature compensation calculation

BS 7 or 6 0198 0199 408 409 R/W 0: Upscale

1: Downscale

YM 7 or 6 019A 019B 410 411 R/W 0: Disable input knee point correction function

1: Enable input knee point correction function

YH 7 or 6 019C 019D 412 413 R/W 0: Deviation setting (set as a deviation from the knee point input

value)

1: Direct setting (value after the correction can directly be set)

YL 7 or 6 019E 019F 414 415 R/W 0 to Input 1_Input span


Factory set value

High limit value of the input range code specified at the time of order.

For V/I inputs: 100.0

Low limit value of the input range code specified at the time of order.

For V/I inputs: 0.0

Input 1_

Input range high 


Input 1_

Input range low 


1

0

0

0

10

No. Name

212 Input 1_Square root extraction

213 Input 1_Inverting input

214 Input data type

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


XH 7 or 6 01A0 01A1 416 417 R/W 0: Unused

1: Used

IB 7 or 6 01A2 01A3 418 419 R/W 0: Unused

1: Used

SE 7 or 6 01A4 01A5 420 421 R/W 0: Number of measured value digits: 5


Modbus data: Double word

1: Number of measured value digits: 4


Modbus data: Single word *

2: HA series equivalent

(Communication of RKC communication and

register address of Modbus switch to the HA series equivalent

data.)

Number of measured value digits: 5

Number of RKC communication digits: 7

Modbus: Double word

PLC communication: Double word


* Including our FB series equivalent data

When changing the Input data type from 0 (or 2) to 1 and when the present Input range has 5 digits (example: Input range high:

1372.0), you need to configure the Input range to have 4 digits beforehand.

The display of the time unit depends on the Input data type.

In case of Input data type 0 or 2


hour/minute, minute/second, second

The time unit is selectable at Soak time unit (RKC communication: RU, Modbus: 02C0H to 02C1H)

Factory set value

0

0

0

No. Name

215 Power supply frequency



Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


JT 7 or 6 01A6 01A7 422 423 R/W 0: 50 Hz

1: 60 Hz

XR 7 or 6 01A8 01A9 424 425 R/W 0: TC input K

1: TC input J

2: TC input R

3: TC input S

4: TC input B

5: TC input E

6: TC input N

13: RTD input Pt100










10: TC input U 23: Voltage input 0 to 100 mV DC

11: TC input L



･ When Measured Input 2 is selected: 0 to 24

･ When Remote setting input is selected: 15 to 24

PT 7 or 6 01AA 01AB 426 427 R/W 0:  C

1:  F

XZ 7 or 6 01AC 01AD 428 429 R/W 0: No decimal place





TC input:



RTD input: 0 to 2




Factory set value

0

Same as

Input 1_Input type

When Remote setting input is specified at the time of order, but the input type is not specified: 17

Same as

Input 1_Display unit

Same as

Input 1_Decimal point position

No. Name




222 Input 2_Input error determination point (low)

224 Input 2_Burnout direction compensation calculation

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


XX 7 or 6 01AE 01AF 430 431 R/W TC/RTD inputs and Voltage (V)/Current (I) Inputs (For other than Remote setting input):

(Input 2_Input range low  1 digit) to Input 2_Maximum value of input range

Voltage (V)/Current (I) Inputs (For Remote setting input):



XY 7 or 6 01B0 01B1 432 433 R/W TC/RTD inputs and Voltage (V)/Current (I) Inputs (For other than Remote setting input):

Input 2_Minimum value of input range to (Input 2_Input range high  1 digit)




AX 7 or 6 01B2 01B3 434 435 R/W Input 2_Input error determination point (low) to Input 2_Input range high  (Input 2_5 % of input span)


AY 7 or 6 01B4 01B5 436 437 R/W Input 2_Input range low  (Input 2_5 % of input span) * to Input 2_Input error determination point (high)



2 Ohms. (Pt100:  245.5  C [  409.8  F] , JPt100:  237.6  C

[  395.7  F])

R1 7 or 6 01B6 01B7 438 439 R/W 0: No temperature compensation calculation

1: With temperature compensation calculation

BR 7 or 6 01B8 01B9 440 441 R/W 0: Upscale

1: Downscale

Factory set value

Same as


Same as

Input 1_Input range low


 (Input 2_

5 % of input span)

Input 2_

Input range low

 (Input 2_

5 % of input span)

1

0

No. Name

225 Input 2_Selection of knee point



229 Input 2_Inverting input function


Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


YN 7 or 6 01BA 01BB 442 443 R/W 0: Disable input knee point correction function

1: Enable input knee point correction function

YI 7 or 6 01BC 01BD 444 445 R/W 0: Deviation setting (set as a deviation from the knee point input

value)

1: Direct setting (value after the correction can directly be set)

YG 7 or 6 01BE 01BF 446 447 R/W 0 to Input 2_Input span


XG 7 or 6 01C0 01C1 448 449 R/W 0: Unused

1: Used

IC 7 or 6 01C2 01C3 450 451 R/W 0: Unused

1: Used

Factory set value

0

0

10

0

0

No. Name

230 DI1 function selection

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


H2 7 or 6 01C4 01C5 452 453 R/W 0: No function

Data range
















13: Set data unlock/lock transfer

14: Direct/Reverse action transfer

15: Memory area transfer (2 points, Without area set signal)


17: Memory area transfer (8 points, With area set signal)



20: Area jump

H3 7 or 6 01C6 01C7 454 455 R/W 0 to 14

Same as DI1 function selection (0 to 14)

H4 7 or 6 01C8 01C9 456 457 R/W 0 to 14


H5 7 or 6 01CA 01CB 458 459 R/W 0 to 14


H6 7 or 6 01CC 01CD 460 461 R/W 0 to 14


Factory set value

Based on Model code

Based on Model code

Based on Model code

Based on Model code

Based on Model code

No. Name


236 DI logic invert

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


H7 7 or 6 01CE 01CF 462 463 R/W 0 to 14


D0 7 or 6 01D0 01D1 464 465 R/W 0 to 31

0: No logic invert

 1: RUN/STOP transfer

 2: Auto/Manual transfer

 4: Remote/Local transfer



 8: Set data unlock/lock transfer

 16: Direct/Reverse action transfer


LJ 7 or 6 01D2 01D3 466 467 R/W 1 to 5 seconds

(Without area set signal)

238 OUT1 function selection E0 7 or 6 01D4 01D5 468 469 R/W 0: No assignment

1: Input 1_Control output [heat-side]

2: Input 1_Control output [cool-side]

5: Logic calculation output

(Event, HBA, LBA, Input error)

6: RUN state output

7: Input 1_Manual mode state output


9: Remote mode state output

(Output of differential temperature control state,

Input 2 state output of Control with PV select)

10: Input 1_Autotuning (AT) state output


12: Output while Set value of Input 1 is changing


14: Output of the communication monitoring result

15: FAIL output

Factory set value

Based on Model code

0

2

Based on Model code

No. Name

239 OUT2 function selection

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


E2 7 or 6 01D6 01D7 470 471 R/W Same as OUT1 function selection

240 OUT3 function selection E3 7 or 6 01D8 01D9 472 473 R/W Same as OUT1 function selection

241 OUT1 logic calculation selection W0 7 or 6 01DA 01DB 474 475 R/W 0 to 4095

OFF

 1: Event 1

 2: Event 2

 4: Event 3

 8: Event 4










W2 7 or 6 01DC 01DD 476 477 R/W Same as OUT1 logic calculation selection 242 OUT2 logic calculation selection

243 OUT3 logic calculation selection W3 7 or 6 01DE 01DF 478 479 R/W Same as OUT1 logic calculation selection

Factory set value

Based on Model code

4

0

Based on Model code

4

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


244 Energized/De-energized NA 7 or 6 01E0 01E1 480 481 R/W 0 to 127

0: All outputs are energized

 1: OUT1 de-energized



 8: DO1 de-energized





246 Output action at control stop

247 Universal output type selection

(OUT3)

LF 7 or 6 01E2 01E3 482 483 R/W 0 to 4095

Unused

 1: Event 1

 2: Event 2

 4: Event 3

 8: Event 4










SS 7 or 6 01E4 01E5 484 485 R/W 0 to 7

OFF

 1: Logic calculation output: Action continues

 2: Retransmission output: Action

 4: Instrument status output: Action continues


XO 7 or 6 01E6 01E7 486 487 R/W 0: Voltage pulse output

1: Current output (4 to 20 mA DC)

2: Current output (0 to 20 mA DC)

Factory set value

0

0

0

1

No. Name

248 Retransmission output 1 type

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


LA 7 or 6 01E8 01E9 488 489 R/W 0: No retransmission output

1: Input 1_Measured value (PV)

2: Input 1_Local SV

3: Input 1_SV monitor value

4: Input 1_Deviation

5: Input 1_Manipulated output value [heat-side]

6: Input 1_Manipulated output value [cool-side]


8: Input 2_Local SV



11: Input 2_Manipulated output value

12: Remote setting input value

13: Current transformer 1 (CT1) input value


15: Measured value (PV) of differential temperature input

Factory set value

0

No. Name scale high

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


HV 7 or 6 01EA 01EB 490 491 R/W No retransmission output, Input 1_Measured value (PV),

Input 1_Local SV, Input 1_SV monitor value, and Remote setting input value





Input 1_Deviation



Input 2_Measured value (PV), Input 2_Local SV, and Input 2_SV monitor value



Input 2_Deviation




 5.0 to +105.0 %

Current transformer (CT) input value

0.0 to 100.0 %




Factory set value

No retransmission output,

Input 1_Measured value

(PV), Input 1_Local SV,

Input 1_SV monitor value, and Remote setting input value:


Control with PV select: PV select input range high

Input 1_Deviation:

 (Input 1_Input span)


(PV), Input 2_Local SV, and Input 2_SV monitor value:


Input 2_Deviation:


Manipulated output value, and Current transformer

(CT) input value:

100.0

Measured value (PV) of differential temperature input:

100

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range Factory set value


250 Retransmission output 1 scale low HW 7 or 6 01EC 01ED 492 493 R/W No retransmission output, Input 1_Measured value (PV),






Input 1_Deviation






Input 2_Deviation




 5.0 to +105.0 %


0.0 to 100.0 %




251 Retransmission output 2 type LB 7 or 6 01EE 01EF 494 495 R/W Same as Retransmission output 1 type

No retransmission output,


(PV), Input 1_Local SV,

Input 1_SV monitor value, and Remote setting input value:


Control with PV select:

PV select input range low

Input 1_Deviation:

 (Input 1_Input span)


(PV), Input 2_Local SV, and Input 2_SV monitor value:


Input 2_Deviation:


Manipulated output value, and Current transformer

(CT) input value:

0.0


 100

0

252 Retransmission output 2 scale high CV 7 or 6 01F0 01F1 496 497 R/W Same as Retransmission output 1 scale high

253 Retransmission output 2 scale low CW 7 or 6 01F2 01F3 498 499 R/W Same as Retransmission output 1 scale low

No. Name


Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


LC 7 or 6 01F4 01F5 500 501 R/W Same as Retransmission output 1 type

255 Retransmission output 3 scale high

256 Retransmission output 3 scale low

257 DO1 function selection

EV 7 or 6 01F6 01F7 502 503 R/W Same as Retransmission output 1 scale high

EW 7 or 6 01F8 01F9 504 505 R/W Same as Retransmission output 1 scale low

E4 7 or 6 01FA 01FB 506 507 R/W 0: No assignment

1: Logic calculation output (Event, HBA, LBA, Input error)

2: RUN state output











11: FAIL output

E5 7 or 6 01FC 01FD 508 509 R/W Same as DO1 function selection 258 DO2 function selection



E6

E7

7 or 6 01FE 01FF

7 or 6 0200 0201

510

512

511

513

R/W Same as DO1 function selection

R/W Same as DO1 function selection

Factory set value

1

Based on Model code

Based on Model code

Based on Model code

Based on Model code

No. Name

261 DO1 logic calculation selection

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


W4 7 or 6 0202 0203 514 515 R/W 0 to 4095

OFF

 1: Event 1

 2: Event 2

 4: Event 3

 8: Event 4










W5 7 or 6 0204 0205 516 517 R/W Same as DO1 logic calculation selection 262 DO2 logic calculation selection



W6

W7

7 or 6 0206

7 or 6 0208

0207

0209

518

520

519

521

R/W Same as DO1 logic calculation selection

R/W Same as DO1 logic calculation selection

FA 7 or 6 020A 020B 522 523 R/W 1: Input 1

2: Input 2

3: Differential temperature input

Factory set value

Based on Model code

Based on Model code

Based on Model code

Based on Model code

1

No. Name

266 Event 1 type

267 Event 1 hold action

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


XA 7 or 6 020C 020D 524 525 R/W 0: None

1: Deviation high (Using SV monitor value) a

2: Deviation low (Using SV monitor value) a

3: Deviation high/low (Using SV monitor value) a

4: Band (Using SV monitor value) a

5: Deviation high/low (Using SV monitor value)

[High/Low individual setting] a

6: Band (Using SV monitor value) [High/Low individual setting] a

7: SV high (Using SV monitor value)

8: SV low (Using SV monitor value)

9: Process high b

10: Process low b

11: Deviation high (Using local SV) a

12: Deviation low (Using local SV) a

13: Deviation high/low (Using local SV) a

14: Band (Using local SV) a

15: Deviation high/low (Using local SV)


16: Band (Using local SV) [High/Low individual setting] a

17: SV high (Using local SV)

18: SV low (Using local SV)

19: MV high [heat-side] b

20: MV low [heat-side] b

21: MV high [cool-side] b

22: MV low [cool-side] b

23: Process high/low [High/Low individual setting] b

24: Process band [High/Low individual setting] b a Event hold and re-hold action is available. b Event hold action is available.

WA 7 or 6 020E 020F 526 527 R/W 0: Hold action OFF

1: Hold action ON

2: Re-hold action ON

Setting hold or re-hold action on the event that is not available with hold and re-hold actions will just be ignored.

Factory set value

If the Event type is specified by the initial setting code when ordering, that Event type will be the factory set value.

If the Event type is not specified: 1

If the Event type is specified by the initial setting code when ordering, the factory set value of Event hold action differs depending on the Event type.


No. Name

268 Event 1 differential gap

269 Event 1 timer

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


HA 7 or 6 0210 0211 528 529 R/W Deviation, Process and SV:

 If event assignment is either Input 1 or Differential temperature.

0 to Input 1_Input span


 If event assignment is Input 2



MV:

0.0 to 110.0 %

TD 7 or 6 0212 0213 530 531 R/W 0.0 to 600.0 seconds

FB 7 or 6 0214 0215 532 533 R/W Same as Event 1 assignment

XB 7 or 6 0216 0217 534 535 R/W Same as Event 1 type 271 Event 2 type



274 Event 2 timer

WB

HB

TG

7 or 6 0218 0219

7 or 6 021A 021B

7 or 6 021C 021D

536

538

540

537

539

541

R/W Same as Event 1 hold action

R/W Same as Event 1 differential gap

R/W Same as Event 1 timer

FC 7 or 6 021E 021F 542 543 R/W Same as Event 1 assignment

XC 7 or 6 0220 0221 544 545 R/W Same as Event 1 type 276 Event 3 type

Factory set value

Deviation, Process and SV:

TC/RTD inputs: 2

V/I inputs:

0.2 % of input span

MV: 0.2

0.0

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


WC 7 or 6 0222 0223 546 547 R/W Same as Event 1 hold action 277 Event 3 hold action


279 Event 3 timer

HC

TE

7 or 6 0224

7 or 6 0226

0225

0227

548

550

549

551



FD 7 or 6 0228 0229 552 553 R/W Same as Event 1 assignment

281 Event 4 type



284 Event 4 timer

XD

WD

HD

TF

7 or 6 022A 022B

7 or 6 022C 022D

7 or 6 022E

7 or 6 0230

022F

0231

554

556

558

560

555

557

559

561

R/W Same as Event 1 type




ZF 7 or 6 0232 0233 562 563 R/W 0: None

1: OUT1

2: OUT2

3: OUT3

YE 7 or 6 0234 0235 564 565 R/W 0: CTL-6-P-N

1: CTL-12-S56-10L-N

2: CTL-6-P-Z

Factory set value

1

Based on Model code

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


XS 7 or 6 0236 0237 566 567 R/W 0 to 9999

When the CT type is changed, the following value will be automatically set.

CTL-6-P-N: 800

CTL-12-S56-10L-N: 1000

CTL-6-P-Z: 800

288 CT1 low input cut-off M5 7 or 6 0238 0239 568 569 R/W 0.0 to 1.0 A

ZG 7 or 6 023A 023B 570 571 R/W 0: None

1: OUT1

2: OUT2

3: OUT3

YF 7 or 6 023C 023D 572 573 R/W 0: CTL-6-P-N

1: CTL-12-S56-10L-N

2: CTL-6-P-Z

XT 7 or 6 023E 023F 574 575 R/W 0 to 9999


CTL-6-P-N: 800

CTL-12-S56-10L-N: 1000

CTL-6-P-Z: 800

292 CT2 low input cut-off M7 7 or 6 0240 0241 576 577 R/W 0.0 to 1.0 A

XN 7 or 6 0242 0243 578 579 R/W 0: Hot/Cold start 1

1: Hot/Cold start 2

2: Cold start

3: STOP start

Factory set value

If CTL-6-P-N or

CTL-6-P-Z is specified for the Current transformer (CT) type:

800

If CTL-12-S56-10L-N is specified for the Current transformer (CT) type:

1000

0.0

Based on Model code

Based on Model code

If CTL-6-P-N or

CTL-6-P-Z is specified for the Current transformer (CT) type:

800

If CTL-12-S56-10L-N is specified for the Current transformer (CT) type:

1000

0.0

0

No. Name

294 Manual manipulated output value selection

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


OT 7 or 6 0244 0245 580 581 R/W 0: The last manipulated output value decimal point position

297 ST start condition

(up) [heat-side]

(down) [heat-side]

1: Manual manipulated output value

XL 7 or 6 0246 0247 582 583 R/W 0 to 3

0: No SV tracking function

 1: SV tracking at transferring Remote/Local *

* Including 2-loop control/Differential temperature control transfer

 2: SV tracking at transferring Auto/Manual


PK 7 or 6 0248 0249 584 585 R/W 0: No decimal place




SU 7 or 6 024A 024B 586 587 R/W 0: Activate the Startup tuning (ST) function when the power is turned on; when transferred from STOP to RUN; or when the

Set value (SV) is changed.

1: Activate the Startup tuning (ST) function when the power is turned on; or when transferred from STOP to RUN.

2: Activate the Startup tuning (ST) function when the Set value

(SV) is changed.

XE 7 or 6 024C 024D 588 589 R/W 0: Brilliant II PID control (direct action)

1: Brilliant II PID control (reverse action)

2: Brilliant II Heat/Cool PID control [water cooling]

3: Brilliant II Heat/Cool PID control [air cooling]

4: Brilliant II Heat/Cool PID control [Cooling linear type]

PH 7 or 6 024E 024F 590 591 R/W 0.0 to 1000.0 %/seconds of manipulated output

0.0: OFF

PL 7 or 6 0250 0251 592 593 R/W 0.0 to 1000.0 %/seconds of manipulated output

0.0: OFF

Factory set value

0

1

2

0

Control action specified at the time of order.

0.0

0.0

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


301 Input 1_Action (high) input error WH 7 or 6 0252 0253 594 595 R/W 0: Control continues (with the latest output)

1: Manipulated output value at input error (Manual mode)

The operation mode is switched to the Manual mode and the

Manipulated output at Input error of Input 1 is output.

2: Manipulated output value at input error (Auto mode)

The operation mode remains in the Auto mode and the


When the error is recovered, the operation mode is switched

to the PID control.

302 Input 1_Action (low) input error WL 7 or 6 0254 0255 596 597 R/W 0: Control continues (with the latest output)








to the PID control.

303 Input 1_Manipulated output value at input error

OE 7 or 6 0256 0257 598 599 R/W PID control

 5.0 to  105.0 %


 105.0 to  105.0 %

OF 7 or 6 0258 0259 600 601 R/W  5.0 to  105.0 % 304 Input 1_ Manipulated output value at STOP [heat-side]

305 Input 1_Start determination point SX 7 or 6 025A 025B 602 603 R/W 0 to Input 1_Input span


0: Operation starts from any start state selected by Hot/Cold start


306 Input 1_Level PID action selection

PP 7 or 6 025C 025D 604 605 R/W 0: Switching by Memory area number

1: Switching by Set value (SV) (Level PID action)

2: Switching by Measured value (PV) (Level PID action)

Factory set value

2

2



0.0

 5.0

3 % of

Input 1_input span


3 % of PV select input span

0

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


Data range

307 Input 1_Level PID differential gap L5 7 or 6 025E 025F 606 607 R/W 0 to Input 1_Input span



XF 7 or 6 0260 0261 608 609 R/W 0: Brilliant II PID control (direct action)


(up)

(down)

PY 7 or 6 0264 0265 612 613 R/W 0.0 to 1000.0 %/seconds of manipulated output

0.0: No function

311 Input 2_Action (high) input error WX 7 or 6 0266 0267 614 615 R/W 0: Control continues (with the latest output)








to the PID control.

312 Input 2_Action (low) input error


WY 7 or 6 0268 0269 616 617 R/W 0: Control continues (with the latest output)








to the PID control.

PE 7 or 6 026A 026B 618 619 R/W  5.0 to  105.0 %

PX 7 or 6 0262 0263 610 611 R/W 0.0 to 1000.0 %/seconds of manipulated output

0.0: No function

Factory set value

TC/RTD inputs: 2

V/I inputs: 0.2% of

Input 1_input span


0.2 % of PV select input span

Same as Input 1_

Control action

0.0

0.0

2



2

5.0

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range

314 Input 2_ Manipulated output value at STOP

OJ


7 or 6 026C 026D 620 621 R/W  5.0 to  105.0 %

315 Input 2_Start determination point SW 7 or 6 026E 026F 622 623 R/W 0 to Input 2_Input span

0: Operation starts from any start state selected by Hot/Cold start


316 Input 2_Level PID action selection

PO 7 or 6 0270 0271 624 625 R/W 0: Switching by Memory area number

1: Switching by Set value (SV) (Level PID action)

2: Switching by Measured value (PV) (Level PID action)

317 Input 2_Level PID differential gap L6 7 or 6 0272 0273 626 627 R/W 0 to Input 2_Input span


(up) [cool-side]

(down) [cool-side]

320 Input 1_ Manipulated output value at STOP [cool-side]

321 Undershoot suppression factor

PM 7 or 6 0274 0275 628 629 R/W 0.0 to 1000.0 %/seconds of manipulated output

0.0: OFF

PN 7 or 6 0276 0277 630 631 R/W 0.0 to 1000.0 %/seconds of manipulated output

0.0: OFF

OG 7 or 6 0278 0279 632 633 R/W  5.0 to  105.0 %

KB 7 or 6 027A 027B 634 635 R/W 0.000 to 1.000

322 Overlap/Deadband reference point

323 Bottom suppression function

UY 7 or 6 027C 027D 636 637 R/W 0.0 to 1.0

G6 7 or 6 027E 027F 638 639 R/W 0: No function

1: FF amount is added by level

2: FF amount is forcibly added

Factory set value

 5.0

3 % of

Input 2_input span

0

TC/RTD inputs: 2

V/I inputs: 0.2% of

Input 2_input span

0.0

0.0

 5.0

Water cooling: 0.100

Air cooling: 0.250

Cooling linear: 1.000

0.0

0

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


324 Select function for input 2

325 Selection of PV select trigger

KL 7 or 6 0280 0281 640 641 R/W 0: No function

1: Remote setting input

2: 2-loop control/Differential temperature control *

3: Control with PV select

6: Input circuit error alarm

* This parameter cannot be specified if the instrument is a

Heat/Cool PID type.

 When Measured input 2 is selected at the time of order:

0 to 3, 6

 When the Remote settting input is selected:

0 to 1

L7 7 or 6 0282 0283 642 643 R/W 0: Switching by level

1: Switching by signal (Key, DI and Communication)

326 Input circuit error alarm set value L4 7 or 6 0284 0285 644 645 R/W 0 to Input 1_Input span

0: No function


IS 7 or 6 0286 0287 646 647 R/W 0: RKC communication

1: Modbus

(Order of data transfer: high-order word to low-order word)

2: Modbus

(Order of data transfer: low-order word to high-order word)

3: PLC communication

QnA compatible 3C frame [Format 4])

IP 7 or 6 0288 0289 648 649 R/W RKC communication: 0 to 99

Modbus: 1 to 99

PLC communication: 0 to 30

IR 7 or 6 028A 028B 650 651 R/W 0: 2400 bps

1: 4800 bps

2: 9600 bps

3: 19200 bps

4: 38400 bps

5: 57600 bps

6: 115200 bps

Factory set value

Based on Model code

0

TC/RTD inputs: 10

V/I inputs:

5 % of

Input 1_Input span

When the communication protocol is specified at the time of order, the specified communication protocol will be the factory set value.

With communication, communication protocol not specified: 0

RKC communication: 0

Modbus: 1

PLC communication: 0

3

No. Name

330 Data bit configuration

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


IQ 7 or 6 028C 028D 652 653 R/W Data bit configuration table

Set value Data bit Parity bit Stop bit

0 8 Without 1

1 8 Without 2

2 8 Even 1

3 8 Even 2

Odd 1

333 Register start number

(High-order 4-bit)

334 Register start number

(Low-order 16-bit)

335 Monitor item register bias

7 Without 2

7 Even 1

10

11

7

7

RKC communication: 0 to 11

Modbus: 0 to 5

Odd 1

Odd 2

IT 7 or 6 028E 028F 654 655 R/W 0 to 250 ms

QZ 7 or 6 0290 0291 656 657 R/W MITSUBISHI PLC

0: D register (data register)

1: R register (file register)

2: W register (link register)

3: ZR register

(Method of specifying consecutive numbers when 32767 of

R register is exceeded.)

QS 7 or 6 0292 0293 658 659 R/W 0 to 15

QX 7 or 6 0294 0295 660 661 R/W 0 to 65535

R3 7 or 6 0296 0297 662 663 R/W 12 to 65535

Factory set value

0

10

0

0

1000

12

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


R4 7 or 6 0298 0299 664 665 R/W 0 to 65535 336 Setting item register bias

337 Instrument link recognition time

338 PLC response waiting time

339 PLC communication start time

340 Slave register bias

341 Number of recognizable devices

QT

VT

R5

R8

QU

7 or 6 029A 029B

7 or 6 029C 029D

7 or 6 029E 029F

7 or 6 02A0 02A1

7 or 6 02A2 02A3

666

668

670

672

674

667

669

671

673

675


R/W 0 to 3000 ms


R/W 0 to 65535

R/W 0 to 30

QV 7 or 6 02A4 02A5 676 677 R/W 0 to 31

QW 7 or 6 02A6 02A7 678 679 R/W 0 to 255

R6 7 or 6 02A8 02A9 680 681 R/W 0 to 65535

R7 7 or 6 02AA 02AB 682 683 R/W 0 to 65535

R9 7 or 6 02AC 02AD 684 685 R/W 0 to 65535


0

255

3459

16512

1024

0

5

255

5

80

8

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


RE 7 or 6 02AE 02AF 686 687 R/W 0 to 65535 347 Setting item selection 1

348 Setting item selection 2







355 Setting change rate limiter unit time

RF

RG

RH

RI

RJ

RK

RL

HU

7 or 6 02B0 02B1

7 or 6 02B2 02B3

7 or 6 02B4 02B5

7 or 6 02B6 02B7

7 or 6 02B8 02B9

7 or 6 02BA 02BB

7 or 6 02BC 02BD

7 or 6 02BE 02BF

688

690

692

694

696

698

700

702

689

691

693

695

697

699

701

703

R/W 0 to 65535

R/W 0 to 65535

R/W 0 to 65535

R/W 0 to 65535

R/W 0 to 65535

R/W 0 to 65535

R/W 0 to 65535

R/W 0.1 to 360.0 seconds


16480

7850

32768

771

0

5

0

0

0.1

No. Name

356 Soak time unit

357 Input 1_Setting limiter high

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


RU 7

6

02C0 02C1 704 705 R/W In case of Input data type 0 or 2

0: 0 hours 00 minutes to 99 hours 59 minutes

1: 0 minutes 00 seconds to 199 minutes 59 seconds

2: 0 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds

to 9 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds

3: 0.00 seconds to 59.99 seconds

    R/W In case of Input data type 1




SH 7 or 6 02C2 02C3 706 707 R/W Input 1_Setting limiter low to Input 1_Input range high

When Control with PV select

Input 1_Setting limiter low to PV select input range high


358 Input 1_Setting limiter low



361 Initialization

362 Set data unlock/lock transfer

SL 7 or 6 02C4 02C5 708 709 R/W Input 1_Setting limiter low to Input 1_Input range high


PV select input range low to Input 1_Setting limiter high


U0 7 or 6 02C6 02C7 710 711 R/W Input 2_Setting limiter low to Input 2_Input range high


U1 7 or 6 02C8 02C9 712 713 R/W Input 2_Input range low to Input 2_Setting limiter high


DC 7 or 6 02CA 02CB 714 715 R/W 1225: Start initialization

Other values: Set values are maintained

After the initialization, this instrument is restarted. This setting will automatically go back to zero.

LU 7 or 6 02CC 02CD 716 717 R/W 0: Unlock state

1: Lock state

Factory set value

3

3

Input 1_

Input range high

When Control with


Input 1_

Input range low

When Control with

PV select: PV select input range low

Input 2_

Input range high

Input 2_

Input range low

0

0

No. Name

363 Set lock level

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


LK 7 or 6 02CE 02CF 718 719 R/W RKC communication

The Set lock level is assigned as a bit image in binary numbers.

Bit 0: SV setting mode *  Parameter select mode

Bit 1: Operation transfer mode

Bit 2: Parameter setting mode

Bit 3 Setup setting mode

Bit 4 Engineering mode


Data 0: Unlock 1: Lock

* The data of Set value (SV) and Interlock release can be locked.

Modbus

0 to 31

365 Select Blind function

 1: SV setting mode *  Parameter select mode

 2: Operation transfer mode

 4: Parameter setting mode

 8: Setup setting mode

 16: Engineering mode


LL 7 or 6 02D0 02D1 720 721 R/W 0: Memory area is adjustable when the setting data is locked.

1: Memory area is not adjustable when the setting data is locked.

(Memory area transfer mode is not displayed)

BQ 7 or 6 02D2 02D3 722 723 R/W 0: Blind function: OFF

1: Blind function: ON

Factory set value

00000

0

0

0

No. Name

366 Fix parameter setting

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


LO 7 or 6 02D4 02D5 724 725 R/W RKC communication

The Fix parameter setting is assigned as a bit image in binary numbers.

Bit 0: Autotuning (AT)

Fixed to PID control

Bit 1: Auto/Manual transfer

Fixed to Auto mode

Bit 2: Remote/Local transfer

Fixed to Local mode

Bit 3: Control response parameter

Fixed to Slow

Bit 4: Hot/Cold start

Fixed to Hot start 2


Data 0: Adjustable 1: Fixed

Modbus

0 to 31

+ 1: Autotuning (AT)

Fixed to PID control

+ 2: Auto/Manual transfer

Fixed to Auto mode

+ 4: Remote/Local transfer

Fixed to Local mode

+ 8: Control response parameter

Fixed to Slow

Fixed to Hot start 2 select LD 7 or 6 02D6 02D7 726 727 R/W 0: Direct registration: OFF

1: Direct registration: ON

368 Parameter select setting 1 BA 7 or 6 02D8 02D9 728 729 R/W 0 to 313 (Screen No.)

0: No registration

Factory set value

00000

0

0

0

373 Parameter select setting 6







No. Name





Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


BB 7 or 6 02DA 02DB 730 731 R/W 0 to 313 (Screen No.)

0: No registration

BC 7 or 6 02DC 02DD 732 733 R/W 0 to 313 (Screen No.)

0: No registration

BD 7 or 6 02DE 02DF 734 735 R/W 0 to 313 (Screen No.)

0: No registration

BE 7 or 6 02E0 02E1 736 737 R/W 0 to 313 (Screen No.)

0: No registration

BF 7 or 6 02E2 02E3 738 739 R/W 0 to 313 (Screen No.)

0: No registration

BG 7 or 6 02E4 02E5 740 741 R/W 0 to 313 (Screen No.)

0: No registration

BH 7 or 6 02E6 02E7 742 743 R/W 0 to 313 (Screen No.)

0: No registration

BI 7 or 6 02E8 02E9 744 745 R/W 0 to 313 (Screen No.)

0: No registration

BJ 7 or 6 02EA 02EB 746 747 R/W 0 to 313 (Screen No.)

0: No registration

BK 7 or 6 02EC 02ED 748 749 R/W 0 to 313 (Screen No.)

0: No registration

BL 7 or 6 02EE 02EF 750 751 R/W 0 to 313 (Screen No.)

0: No registration


0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

No. Name





384 Dummy data (REX-F400/700/

900: For Bar-graph display selection)


900: For Second alarm energized/ de-energized selection)


900: For Local mode/computer mode identification)


900: For Operation execution

(RUN)/STOP transfer)


900: For First alarm action selection at input abnormality)


900: For Second alarm action selection at input abnormality)

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


BM 7 or 6 02F0 02F1 752 753 R/W 0 to 313 (Screen No.)

0: No registration

BN 7 or 6 02F2 02F3 754 755 R/W 0 to 313 (Screen No.)

0: No registration

BO 7 or 6 02F4 02F5 756 757 R/W 0 to 313 (Screen No.)

0: No registration

BP 7 or 6 02F6 02F7 758 759 R/W 0 to 313 (Screen No.)

0: No registration

DA 7 or 6     R/W The read data is “0.”

When data is written, a normal response message will be returned to the all of the values, but “0” will be written.

NB 7 or 6   

RA 7 or 6   

 R/W The read data is “0.”


 RO The read data is “0.”

DH

OA

OB

7 or 6

7 or 6

7 or 6



















 R/W The read data is “0.”






R/W The read data is “0.”




Factory set value

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

6.3 RKC Communication/Modbus (Double Word) [Memory Area]

6.3.2 Memory area data (Direct designation method)

[Modbus double word]

Register addresses 0500H to 0E1FH are used to check and change set values belonging to the Memory area.

For Memory area, refer to the 5.9 How to Use Memory Area Data (P. 5-18) .



Memory area 1 data

Register address

Factory set value

No. Name







[high] bute

Data range

0500 0501 1280 1281 R/W Input 1_Setting limiter low to



0502 0503 1282 1283 R/W Input 2_Setting limiter low to



0504 0505 1284 1285 R/W (Input 1_Input span) to



0506 0507 1286 1287 R/W Deviation


 (Input 1_Input span) to





When Control with PV select is selected at

Select function for input 2

 (PV select input span) to

 (PV select input span)




Input 1_Input range low to










PV select input range low to




 5.0 to  105.0 %

0

0

0

TC/RTD inputs:

10

V/I inputs:

5 % of input span

50.0

6-80

IMR03D07-E1


Register address

No. Name

Low-order High-order Low-order High-order bute

5 Event 1 set value (EV1’)

[low]

Data range

Factory set value

0508 0509 1288 1289 R/W Deviation

When assigned to Input_1 or Differential temperature input


 ( Input 1_Input span)





Select function for Input 2

 (PV select input span) to

 (PV select input span)


TC/RTD inputs:

 10

V/I inputs:

 5 % of input span












Select function for Input 2

PV select input range low to



050A 050B 1290 1291 R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1)/Event 1 set value (EV1)

[high]



[high]


[low]



[high]


[low]



[high]


[low]

050C 050D 1292 1293 R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1’) [low]

050E 050F 1294 1295 R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1)/Event 1 set value (EV1)

[high]

0510 0511 1296 1297 R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1’) [low]

0512 0513 1298 1299 R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1)/Event 1 set value (EV1)

[high]

0514 0515 1300 1301 R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1’) [low]

IMR03D07-E1

6-81


Register address

No. Name




19 Input 1_Output limiter

20 Input 1_Output limiter

22 band [heat-side]

[heat-side]

[heat-side] parameter intensity high [heat-side] low [heat-side] break alarm (LBA) time

Input 1_LBA deadband

(LBD) band

Data range

Factory set value

0 (0.0, 0.00) to Input 1_Input span

(Unit:  C [  F])





(When Control with PV select:

0.0 to 1000.0 % of PV select input span)

0 (0.0, 0.00): ON/OFF action

0518 0519 1304 1305 R/W PID control or Heat/Cool PID control

0 to 3600 seconds, 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds,

0.00 to 360.00 seconds or

0.000 to 36.000 seconds

0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PD action

[Varies with the setting of the Integral/

Derivative time decimal point position.]

051A 051B 1306 1307 R/W 0 to 3600 seconds, 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds,


0.000 to 36.000 seconds

0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PI action



051C 051D 1308 1309 R/W 0: Slow 1: Medium 2: Fast


051E 051F 1310 1311 R/W 0 to 4

0: No function

0520 0521 1312 1313 R/W  100.0 to  100.0 %

0522 0523 1314 1315 R/W  100.0 to  100.0 %

0524 0525 1316 1317 R/W Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] to

105.0 %

0526 0527 1318 1319 R/W 5.0 % to Input 1_Output limiter high

[heat-side]

0528 0529 1320 1321 R/W 0 to 7200 seconds

0: No function

TC/RTD inputs:



30

V/I inputs:

3.0

240.00

60.00

PID control: 0

Heat/Cool PID control: 2

2

0.0

0.0

105.0

5.0

LBA function is specified:

480


0 052A 052B 1322 1323 R/W 0 to Input 1_Input span


0 to PV select input span)



(Unit:  C [  F])




0 (0.0, 0.00): ON/OFF action

TC/RTD inputs:

30

V/I inputs:

3.0

6-82

IMR03D07-E1


Register address

No. Name


Data range

Factory set value

24 Input 2_Integral time 052E 052F 1326 1327 R/W 0 to 3600 seconds, 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds,


0.000 to 36.000 seconds

0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PD action



25 Input 2_Derivative time 0530 0531 1328 1329 R/W 0 to 3600 seconds, 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds,


0.000 to 36.000 seconds

0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PI action


Derivative time decimal point position.] parameter

0532 0533 1330 1331 R/W 0: Slow 1: Medium 2: Fast

[When the P or PD action is selected, this setting becomes invalid] intensity




0534 0535 1332 1333 R/W 0 to 4

0: No function

0536 0537 1334 1335 R/W  100.0 to  100.0 %

0538 0539 1336 1337 R/W  100.0 to  100.0 %

053A 053B 1338 1339 R/W Input 2_Output limiter low to 105.0 %

053C 053D 1340 1341 R/W  5.0 % to Input 2_Output limiter high break alarm (LBA) time

053E 053F 1342 1343 R/W 0 to 7200 seconds

0: No function

33 Input 2_LBA deadband

(LBD)

240.00

60.00

0.0

0.0

105.0



0

2

5.0

0540 0541 1344 1345 R/W 0 to Input 2_Input span



480


0 band [cool-side]

TC/RTD inputs:

30

V/I inputs:

3.0

[cool-side]


[cool-side]


(Unit:  C [  F])







0.1 to 1000.0 % of PV select input span)

0544 0545 1348 1349 R/W 0 to 3600 seconds, 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds,


0.000 to 36.000 seconds

0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PD action





0.000 to 36.000 seconds

0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PI action



240.00

60.00

IMR03D07-E1

6-83


Register address

No. Name


Overlap/Deadband

38 Input 1_Output limiter high [cool-side]


39 Input 1_Output limiter low [cool-side]

40 Select Trigger type for

Memory area transfer

Data range





(Unit:  C [  F])



 100.0 to  100.0 % of Input 1_Input span


 100.0 to  100.0 % of PV select input span

Minus (  ) setting results in Overlap.

However, the overlapping range is within the proportional range.

054A 054B 1354 1355 R/W Heat/Cool PID control

Input 1_Output limiter low [cool-side] to

105.0 %

PID control

 5.0 % to Input 1_Output limiter high

[heat-side]


054C 054D 1356 1357 R/W  5.0 % to Input 1_Output limiter high

[cool-side]

054E 054F 1358 1359 R/W 0 to 63

0: assignment

 1: Event 1

 2: Event 2

 4: Event 3

 8: Event 4

 16: Digital input 1 (DI1) Close edge

 32: Digital input 1 (DI1) Open edge


Factory set value

TC/RTD inputs:

0

V/I inputs:

0.0

105.0





5.0

5.0

0

6-84

IMR03D07-E1


Register address

No. Name


41 Area soak time

42 Link area number rate limiter (up) rate limiter (down) transfer selection (Area) output value (Area) rate limiter (up)

Data range

Factory set value

0550 0051 1360 1361 R/W In case of Input data type 0 or 2


0 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds to

9 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds


0 minutes 00 seconds to

199 minutes 59 seconds



 Modbus


0 to 5999 minutes







0 minutes 00 seconds to

199 minutes 59 seconds








0552 0553 1362 1363 R/W 0 to 16

0: No function




0: No function





0: No function


0558 0559 1368 1369 R/W 0: No transfer


2: Auto mode (bump)



RKC communication:

0:00

(0.00 seconds)

Modbus:

0

RKC communication:

0:00

(0.00 seconds)

Modbus:

0

0

0

0

0

 5.0 to  105.0 %


 105.0 to  105.0 %

PID control:

 5.0


0.0

0 055C 055D 1372 1373 R/W 0 to Input 2_Input span

0: No function


IMR03D07-E1

6-85


Register address

No. Name

Low-order High-order Low-order High-order bute rate limiter (down) transfer selection (Area)

Data range

055E 055F 1374 1375 R/W 0 to Input 2_Input span

0: No function


0560 0561 1376 1377 R/W 0: No transfer


2: Auto mode (bump)



0562 0563 1378 1379 R/W 5.0 to  105.0 % output value (Area) selection (Area)



0564 0565 1380 1381 R/W When Select function for input 2 is:

“Remote setting input”

0: No transfer

1: Local mode

2: Remote mode

When Select function for input 2 is:

“Control with PV select”

0: No transfer

1: Input 1

2: Input 2


0: No transfer

1: 2-loop control


0566 0567 1382 1383 R/W 0 to 5


0568 0569 1384 1385 R/W Input 1_Input range low to



056A 056B 1386 1387 R/W Same as Input 1_Knee point input value 1 54 Input 1_Knee point input value 2





056C 056D

056E

0570

056F

0571

1388

1390

1392

1389

1391

1393




Factory set value



0

0

5.0

0

5

Input 1_Input range high setting:


Direct setting:




0574 0575 1396 1397 R/W Same as Input 1_Knee point correction value 1

Deviation setting:

0

Direct setting:



6-86

IMR03D07-E1


Register address

No. Name


Data range

Factory set value







057A 057B 1402 1403 R/W Same as Input 1_Knee point correction value 1


057C 057D 1404 1405 R/W 0 to 5


057E 057F 1406 1407 R/W Input 2_Input range low to



0580 0581 1408 1409 R/W Same as Input 2_Knee point input value 1

5









0586 0587 1414 1415 R/W Same as Input 2_Knee point input value 1 setting:


Direct setting:




058A 058B 1418 1419 R/W Same as Input 2_Knee point correction value 1

Deviation setting:

0

Direct setting:






058C 058D 1420 1421 R/W Same as Input 2_Knee point correction value 1

058E 058F 1422 1423 R/W Same as Input 2_Knee point correction value 1




Memory area 2 to 16 data

For details of attribute, data range and factory set values, refer to the same line No. in  Memory area 1 data (P. 6-80) .

IMR03D07-E1

6-87

6.3 RKC Communication/Modbus (Double Word) [Data Mapping]

Memory area 2 to 4 data

No.

Name


8




10




Register address

HEX DEC

Low: Low-order High: High-order


Register address

HEX DEC


Register address

HEX DEC



Low High Low High Low High Low High Low High Low High

0592

0594

0593

0595

1426

1428

1427

1429

0624

0626

0625

0627

1572

1574

1573

1575

06B6

06B8

06B7

06B9

1718

1720

1719

1721

3 Set value (SV) of differential temperature input 0596 0597 1430 1431 0628 0629 1576 1577 06BA 06BB 1722 1723

4




0598

059A

0599

059B

1432

1434

1433

1435

062A

062C

062B

062D

1578

1580

1579

1581

06BC 06BD

06BE 06BF

1724

1726

1725

1727

6



059C 059D 1436 1437 062E 062F 1582 1583 06C0 06C1 1728 1729

059E 059F 1438 1439 0630 0631 1584 1585 06C2 06C3 1730 1731

05A0 05A1

05A2 05A3

05A4 05A5

1440

1442

1444

1441

1443

1445

0632

0634

0636

0633

0635

0637

1586

1588

1590

1587

1589

1591

06C4

06C6

06C8

06C5

06C7

06C9

1732

1734

1736

1733

1735

1737


12 Input 1_Proportional band [heat-side]

13 Input 1_Integral time [heat-side]

14 Input 1_Derivative time [heat-side]

15 Input 1_Control response parameter

16 Input 1_Proactive intensity

05A6 05A7 1446 1447 0638 0639 1592 1593 06CA 06CB 1738 1739

05A8 05A9 1448 1449 063A 063B 1594 1595 06CC 06CD 1740 1741

05AA 05AB 1450 1451 063C 063D 1596 1597 06CE 06CF 1742 1743

05AC 05AD 1452 1453 063E 063F 1598 1599 06D0 06D1 1744 1745

05AE 05AF 1454 1455 0640 0641 1600 1601 06D2 06D3 1746 1747

05B0 05B1 1456 1457 0642 0643 1602 1603 06D4 06D5 1748 1749

17 Input 1_Manual reset


19 Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side]

05B2 05B3 1458 1459 0644 0645 1604 1605 06D6 06D7 1750 1751

05B4 05B5 1460 1461 0646 0647 1606 1607 06D8 06D9 1752 1753

05B6 05B7 1462 1463 0648 0649 1608 1609 06DA 06DB 1754 1755

20 Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] 05B8 05B9 1464 1465 064A 064B 1610 1611 06DC 06DD 1756 1757

21 Input 1_Control loop break alarm (LBA) time 05BA 05BB 1466 1467 064C 064D 1612 1613 06DE 06DF 1758 1759

22 Input 1_LBA deadband (LBD) 05BC 05BD 1468 1469 064E 064F 1614 1615 06E0 06E1 1760 1761


24 Input 2_Integral time

05BE 05BF 1470 1471 0650 0651 1616 1617 06E2 06E3 1762 1763

05C0 05C1 1472 1473 0652 0653 1618 1619 06E4 06E5 1764 1765







05C2 05C3 1474 1475 0654 0655 1620 1621 06E6 06E7 1766 1767

05C4 05C5 1476 1477 0656 0657 1622 1623 06E8 06E9 1768 1769

05C6 05C7 1478 1479 0658 0659 1624 1625 06EA 06EB 1770 1771

05C8 05C9 1480 1481 065A 065B 1626 1627 06EC 06ED 1772 1773

05CA 05CB 1482 1483 065C 065D 1628 1629 06EE 06EF 1774 1775

05CC 05CD 1484 1485 065E 065F 1630 1631 06F0 06F1 1776 1777

31 Input 2_Output limiter low 05CE 05CF 1486 1487 0660 0661 1632 1633 06F2 06F3 1778 1779

32 Input 2_Control loop break alarm (LBA) time 05D0 05D1 1488 1489 0662 0663 1634 1635 06F4 06F5 1780 1781

33 Input 2_LBA deadband (LBD) 05D2 05D3 1490 1491 0664 0665 1636 1637 06F6 06F7 1782 1783

34 Input 1_Proportional band [cool-side]


36 Input 1_Derivative time [cool-side]

37 Input 1_Overlap/Deadband

38




05D4 05D5 1492 1493 0666 0667 1638 1639 06F8 06F9 1784 1785

05D6 05D7 1494 1495 0668 0669 1640 1641 06FA 06FB 1786 1787

05D8 05D9

05DA 05DB

1496

1498

05DC 05DD 1500

1497

1499

1501

066A

066C

066E

066B

066D

066F

1642

1644

1646

1643

1645

1647

06FC 06FD

06FE

0700

06FF

0701

1788

1790

1792

1789

1791

1793

05DE 05DF 1502 1503 0670 0671 1648 1649 0702 0703 1794 1795

40 Select Trigger type for Memory area transfer 05E0 05E1 1504 1505 0672 0673 1650 1651 0704 0705 1796 1797

41 Area soak time 05E2 05E3 1506 1507 0674 0675 1652 1653 0706 0707 1798 1799

42 Link area number



05E4 05E5 1508 1509 0676 0677 1654 1655 0708 0709 1800 1801

05E6 05E7 1510 1511 0678 0679 1656 1657 070A 070B 1802 1803

05E8 05E9 1512 1513 067A 067B 1658 1659 070C 070D 1804 1805

45 Input 1_Auto/Manual transfer selection (Area) 05EA 05EB 1514 1515 067C 067D 1660 1661 070E 070F 1806 1807

46 Input 1_Manipulated output value (Area) 05EC 05ED 1516 1517 067E 067F 1662 1663 0710 0711 1808 1809

47 Input 2_Setting change rate limiter (up) 05EE 05EF 1518 1519 0680 0681 1664 1665 0712 0713 1810 1811

48 Input 2_Setting change rate limiter (down) 05F0 05F1 1520 1521 0682 0683 1666 1667 0714 0715 1812 1813

6-88

IMR03D07-E1



No.

Name


Register address

HEX DEC



Register address

HEX DEC


Register address

HEX DEC


49 Input 2_Auto/Manual transfer selection (Area) 05F2 05F3 1522 1523 0684 0685 1668 1669 0716 0717 1814 1815

50 Input 2_Manipulated output value (Area) 05F4 05F5 1524 1525 0686 0687 1670 1671 0718 0719 1816 1817

51 Remote/Local transfer selection (Area)























05F6 05F7 1526 1527 0688 0689 1672 1673 071A 071B 1818 1819

05F8 05F9 1528 1529 068A 068B 1674 1675 071C 071D 1820 1821

05FA 05FB 1530 1531 068C 068D 1676 1677 071E 071F 1822 1823

05FC 05FD 1532 1533 068E 068F 1678 1679 0720 0721 1824 1825

05FE 05FF 1534 1535 0690 0691 1680 1681 0722 0723 1826 1827

0600 0601 1536 1537 0692 0693 1682 1683 0724 0725 1828 1829

0602 0603 1538 1539 0694 0695 1684 1685 0726 0727 1830 1831

0604 0605 1540 1541 0696 0697 1686 1687 0728 0729 1832 1833

0606 0607 1542 1543 0698 0699 1688 1689 072A 072B 1834 1835

0608 0609 1544 1545 069A 069B 1690 1691 072C 072D 1836 1837

060A 060B 1546 1547 069C 069D 1692 1693 072E 072F 1838 1839

060C 060D 1548 1549 069E 069F 1694 1695 0730 0731 1840 1841

060E 060F 1550 1551 06A0 06A1 1696 1697 0732 0733 1842 1843

0610 0611 1552 1553 06A2 06A3 1698 1699 0734 0735 1844 1845

0612 0613 1554 1555 06A4 06A5 1700 1701 0736 0737 1846 1847

0614 0615 1556 1557 06A6 06A7 1702 1703 0738 0739 1848 1849

0616 0617 1558 1559 06A8 06A9 1704 1705 073A 073B 1850 1851

0618 0619 1560 1561 06AA 06AB 1706 1707 073C 073D 1852 1853

061A 061B 1562 1563 06AC 06AD 1708 1709 073E 073F 1854 1855

061C 061D 1564 1565 06AE 06AF 1710 1711 0740 0741 1856 1857

061E 061F 1566 1567 06B0 06B1 1712 1713 0742 0743 1858 1859

0620 0621 1568 1569 06B2 06B3 1714 1715 0744 0745 1860 1861

0622 0623 1570 1571 06B4 06B5 1716 1717 0746 0747 1862 1863

IMR03D07-E1 6-89



No.

Name


8




10




Register address

HEX DEC



Register address

HEX DEC


Register address

HEX DEC




0748

074A

0749

074B

1864

1866

1865 07DA 07DB

1867

2010

07DC 07DD 2012

2011

2013

086C

086E

086D

086F

2156

2158

2157

2159

3 Set value (SV) of differential temperature input 074C 074D 1868 1869 07DE 07DF 2014 2015 0870 0871 2160 2161

4




074E

0750

074F

0751

1870

1872

1871

1873

07E0

07E2

07E1

07E3

2016

2018

2017

2019

0872

0874

0873

0875

2162

2164

2163

2165

6



0752 0753 1874 1875 07E4 07E5 2020 2021 0876 0877 2166 2167

0754 0755 1876 1877 07E6 07E7 2022 2023 0878 0879 2168 2169

0756

0758

075A

0757

0759

075B

1878

1880

1882

1879

1881

1883

07E8 07E9

07EA 07EB

07EC 07ED

2024

2026

2028

2025

2027

2029

087A

087C

087E

087B

087D

087F

2170

2172

2174

2171

2173

2175







075C 075D 1884 1885 07EE 07EF 2030 2031 0880 0881 2176 2177

075E 075F 1886 1887 07F0 07F1 2032 2033 0882 0883 2178 2179

0760 0761 1888 1889 07F2 07F3 2034 2035 0884 0885 2180 2181

0762 0763 1890 1891 07F4 07F5 2036 2037 0886 0887 2182 2183

0764 0765 1892 1893 07F6 07F7 2038 2039 0888 0889 2184 2185

0766 0767 1894 1895 07F8 07F9 2040 2041 088A 088B 2186 2187




0768 0769 1896 1897 07FA 07FB 2042 2043 088C 088D 2188 2189

076A 076B 1898 1899 07FC 07FD 2044 2045 088E 088F 2190 2191

076C 076D 1900 1901 07FE 07FF 2046 2047 0890 0891 2192 2193

20 Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] 076E 076F 1902 1903 0800 0801 2048 2049 0892 0893 2194 2195

21 Input 1_Control loop break alarm (LBA) time 0770 0771 1904 1905 0802 0803 2050 2051 0894 0895 2196 2197

22 Input 1_LBA deadband (LBD) 0772 0773 1906 1907 0804 0805 2052 2053 0896 0897 2198 2199



0774 0775 1908 1909 0806 0807 2054 2055 0898 0899 2200 2201

0776 0777 1910 1911 0808 0809 2056 2057 089A 089B 2202 2203







0778 0779 1912 1913 080A 080B 2058 2059 089C 089D 2204 2205

077A 077B 1914 1915 080C 080D 2060 2061 089E 089F 2206 2207

077C 077D 1916 1917 080E 080F 2062 2063 08A0 08A1 2208 2209

077E 077F 1918 1919 0810 0811 2064 2065 08A2 08A3 2210 2211

0780 0781 1920 1921 0812 0813 2066 2067 08A4 08A5 2212 2213

0782 0783 1922 1923 0814 0815 2068 2069 08A6 08A7 2214 2215

31 Input 2_Output limiter low 0784 0785 1924 1925 0816 0817 2070 2071 08A8 08A9 2216 2217

32 Input 2_Control loop break alarm (LBA) time 0786 0787 1926 1927 0818 0819 2072 2073 08AA 08AB 2218 2219

33 Input 2_LBA deadband (LBD) 0788 0789 1928 1929 081A 081B 2074 2075 08AC 08AD 2220 2221





38




078A

078C

078E 078F 1934 1935 0820 0821 2080 2081 08B2 08B3 2226 2227

0790 0791 1936 1937 0822 0823 2082 2083 08B4 08B5 2228 2229

0792

078B

078D

0793

1930

1932

1938

1931

1933

1939

081C

081E

0824

081D

081F

0825

2076

2078

2084

2077

2079

2085

08AE 08AF

08B0

08B6

08B1

08B7

2222

2224

2230

2223

2225

2231


41 Area soak time

0794 0795 1940 1941 0826 0827 2086 2087 08B8 08B9 2232 2233

0796 0797 1942 1943 0828 0829 2088 2089 08BA 08BB 2234 2235

0798 0799 1944 1945 082A 082B 2090 2091 08BC 08BD 2236 2237

42 Link area number



079A 079B 1946 1947 082C 082D 2092 2093 08BE 08BF 2238 2239

079C 079D 1948 1949 082E 082F 2094 2095 08C0 08C1 2240 2241

079E 079F 1950 1951 0830 0831 2096 2097 08C2 08C3 2242 2243

45 Input 1_Auto/Manual transfer selection (Area) 07A0 07A1 1952 1953 0832 0833 2098 2099 08C4 08C5 2244 2245

46 Input 1_Manipulated output value (Area) 07A2 07A3 1954 1955 0834 0835 2100 2101 08C6 08C7 2246 2247

47 Input 2_Setting change rate limiter (up) 07A4 07A5 1956 1957 0836 0837 2102 2103 08C8 08C9 2248 2249

48 Input 2_Setting change rate limiter (down) 07A6 07A7 1958 1959 0838 0839 2104 2105 08CA 08CB 2250 2251

6-90

IMR03D07-E1



No.

Name


Register address

HEX DEC



Register address

HEX DEC


Register address

HEX DEC


49 Input 2_Auto/Manual transfer selection (Area) 07A8 07A9 1960 1961 083A 083B 2106 2107 08CC 08CD 2252 2253

50 Input 2_Manipulated output value (Area) 07AA 07AB 1962 1963 083C 083D 2108 2109 08CE 08CF 2254 2255
























07AC 07AD 1964 1965 083E 083F 2110 2111 08D0 08D1 2256 2257

07AE 07AF 1966 1967 0840 0841 2112 2113 08D2 08D3 2258 2259

07B0 07B1 1968 1969 0842 0843 2114 2115 08D4 08D5 2260 2261

07B2 07B3 1970 1971 0844 0845 2116 2117 08D6 08D7 2262 2263

07B4 07B5 1972 1973 0846 0847 2118 2119 08D8 08D9 2264 2265

07B6 07B7 1974 1975 0848 0849 2120 2121 08DA 08DB 2266 2267

07B8 07B9 1976 1977 084A 084B 2122 2123 08DC 08DD 2268 2269

07BA 07BB 1978 1979 084C 084D 2124 2125 08DE 08DF 2270 2271

07BC 07BD 1980 1981 084E 084F 2126 2127 08E0 08E1 2272 2273

07BE 07BF 1982 1983 0850 0851 2128 2129 08E2 08E3 2274 2275

07C0 07C1 1984 1985 0852 0853 2130 2131 08E4 08E5 2276 2277

07C2 07C3 1986 1987 0854 0855 2132 2133 08E6 08E7 2278 2279

07C4 07C5 1988 1989 0856 0857 2134 2135 08E8 08E9 2280 2281

07C6 07C7 1990 1991 0858 0859 2136 2137 08EA 08EB 2282 2283

07C8 07C9 1992 1993 085A 085B 2138 2139 08EC 08ED 2284 2285

07CA 07CB 1994 1995 085C 085D 2140 2141 08EE 08EF 2286 2287

07CC 07CD 1996 1997 085E 085F 2142 2143 08F0 08F1 2288 2289

07CE 07CF 1998 1999 0860 0861 2144 2145 08F2 08F3 2290 2291

07D0 07D1 2000 2001 0862 0863 2146 2147 08F4 08F5 2292 2293

07D2 07D3 2002 2003 0864 0865 2148 2149 08F6 08F7 2294 2295

07D4 07D5 2004 2005 0866 0867 2150 2151 08F8 08F9 2296 2297

07D6 07D7 2006 2007 0868 0869 2152 2153 08FA 08FB 2298 2299

07D8 07D9 2008 2009 086A 086B 2154 2155 08FC 08FD 2300 2301

IMR03D07-E1 6-91



No.

Name


8




10




Register address

HEX DEC



Register address

HEX DEC


Register address

HEX DEC




08FE

0900

08FF

0901

2302

2304

2303

2305

0990

0992

0991

0993

2448

2450

2449

2451

0A22 0A23

0A24 0A25

2594

2596

2595

2597

3 Set value (SV) of differential temperature input 0902 0903 2306 2307 0994 0995 2452 2453 0A26 0A27 2598 2599

4




0904

0906

0905

0907

2308

2310

2309

2311

0996

0998

0997

0999

2454

2456

2455

2457

0A28 0A29

0A2A 0A2B

2600

2602

2601

2603

6



0908 0909 2312 2313 099A 099B 2458 2459 0A2C 0A2D 2604 2605

090A 090B 2314 2315 099C 099D 2460 2461 0A2E 0A2F 2606 2607

090C

090E

0910

090D

090F

0911

2316

2318

2320

2317

2319

2321

099E 099F

09A0 09A1

09A2 09A3

2462

2464

2466

2463

2465

2467

0A30 0A31

0A32 0A33

0A34 0A35

2608

2610

2612

2609

2611

2613







0912 0913 2322 2323 09A4 09A5 2468 2469 0A36 0A37 2614 2615

0914 0915 2324 2325 09A6 09A7 2470 2471 0A38 0A39 2616 2617

0916 0917 2326 2327 09A8 09A9 2472 2473 0A3A 0A3B 2618 2619

0918 0919 2328 2329 09AA 09AB 2474 2475 0A3C 0A3D 2620 2621

091A 091B 2330 2331 09AC 09AD 2476 2477 0A3E 0A3F 2622 2623

091C 091D 2332 2333 09AE 09AF 2478 2479 0A40 0A41 2624 2625




091E 091F 2334 2335 09B0 09B1 2480 2481 0A42 0A43 2626 2627

0920 0921 2336 2337 09B2 09B3 2482 2483 0A44 0A45 2628 2629

0922 0923 2338 2339 09B4 09B5 2484 2485 0A46 0A47 2630 2631

20 Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] 0924 0925 2340 2341 09B6 09B7 2486 2487 0A48 0A49 2632 2633

21 Input 1_Control loop break alarm (LBA) time 0926 0927 2342 2343 09B8 09B9 2488 2489 0A4A 0A4B 2634 2635

22 Input 1_LBA deadband (LBD) 0928 0929 2344 2345 09BA 09BB 2490 2491 0A4C 0A4D 2636 2637



092A 092B 2346 2347 09BC 09BD 2492 2493 0A4E 0A4F 2638 2639

092C 092D 2348 2349 09BE 09BF 2494 2495 0A50 0A51 2640 2641







092E 092F 2350 2351 09C0 09C1 2496 2497 0A52 0A53 2642 2643

0930 0931 2352 2353 09C2 09C3 2498 2499 0A54 0A55 2644 2645

0932 0933 2354 2355 09C4 09C5 2500 2501 0A56 0A57 2646 2647

0934 0935 2356 2357 09C6 09C7 2502 2503 0A58 0A59 2648 2649

0936 0937 2358 2359 09C8 09C9 2504 2505 0A5A 0A5B 2650 2651

0938 0939 2360 2361 09CA 09CB 2506 2507 0A5C 0A5D 2652 2653

31 Input 2_Output limiter low 093A 093B 2362 2363 09CC 09CD 2508 2509 0A5E 0A5F 2654 2655

32 Input 2_Control loop break alarm (LBA) time 093C 093D 2364 2365 09CE 09CF 2510 2511 0A60 0A61 2656 2657

33 Input 2_LBA deadband (LBD) 093E 093F 2366 2367 09D0 09D1 2512 2513 0A62 0A63 2658 2659





38




0940 0941 2368 2369 09D2 09D3 2514 2515 0A64 0A65 2660 2661

0942 0943 2370 2371 09D4 09D5 2516 2517 0A66 0A67 2662 2663

0944

0946

0948

0945

0947

0949

2372

2374

2376

2373

2375

09D6 09D7

09D8 09D9

2377 09DA 09DB

2518

2520

2522

2519

2521

2523

0A68 0A69

0A6A 0A6B

2664

2666

0A6C 0A6D 2668

2665

2667

2669

094A 094B 2378 2379 09DC 09DD 2524 2525 0A6E 0A6F 2670 2671

40 Select Trigger type for Memory area transfer 094C 094D 2380 2381 09DE 09DF 2526 2527 0A70 0A71 2672 2673

41 Area soak time 094E 094F 2382 2383 09E0 09E1 2528 2529 0A72 0A73 2674 2675

42 Link area number



0950 0951 2384 2385 09E2 09E3 2530 2531 0A74 0A75 2676 2677

0952 0953 2386 2387 09E4 09E5 2532 2533 0A76 0A77 2678 2679

0954 0955 2388 2389 09E6 09E7 2534 2535 0A78 0A79 2680 2681

45 Input 1_Auto/Manual transfer selection (Area) 0956 0957 2390 2391 09E8 09E9 2536 2537 0A7A 0A7B 2682 2683

46 Input 1_Manipulated output value (Area) 0958 0959 2392 2393 09EA 09EB 2538 2539 0A7C 0A7D 2684 2685

47 Input 2_Setting change rate limiter (up) 095A 095B 2394 2395 09EC 09ED 2540 2541 0A7E 0A7F 2686 2687

48 Input 2_Setting change rate limiter (down) 095C 095D 2396 2397 09EE 09EF 2542 2543 0A80 0A81 2688 2689

6-92

IMR03D07-E1



No.

Name


Register address

HEX DEC



Register address

HEX DEC


Register address

HEX DEC


49 Input 2_Auto/Manual transfer selection (Area) 095E 095F 2398 2399 09F0 09F1 2544 2545 0A82 0A83 2690 2691

50 Input 2_Manipulated output value (Area) 0960 0961 2400 2401 09F2 09F3 2546 2547 0A84 0A85 2692 2693
























0962 0963 2402 2403 09F4 09F5 2548 2549 0A86 0A87 2694 2695

0964 0965 2404 2405 09F6 09F7 2550 2551 0A88 0A89 2696 2697

0966 0967 2406 2407 09F8 09F9 2552 2553 0A8A 0A8B 2698 2699

0968 0969 2408 2409 09FA 09FB 2554 2555 0A8C 0A8D 2700 2701

096A 096B 2410 2411 09FC 09FD 2556 2557 0A8E 0A8F 2702 2703

096C 096D 2412 2413 09FE 09FF 2558 2559 0A90 0A91 2704 2705

096E 096F 2414 2415 0A00 0A01 2560 2561 0A92 0A93 2706 2707

0970 0971 2416 2417 0A02 0A03 2562 2563 0A94 0A95 2708 2709

0972 0973 2418 2419 0A04 0A05 2564 2565 0A96 0A97 2710 2711

0974 0975 2420 2421 0A06 0A07 2566 2567 0A98 0A99 2712 2713

0976 0977 2422 2423 0A08 0A09 2568 2569 0A9A 0A9B 2714 2715

0978 0979 2424 2425 0A0A 0A0B 2570 2571 0A9C 0A9D 2716 2717

097A 097B 2426 2427 0A0C 0A0D 2572 2573 0A9E 0A9F 2718 2719

097C 097D 2428 2429 0A0E 0A0F 2574 2575 0AA0 0AA1 2720 2721

097E 097F 2430 2431 0A10 0A11 2576 2577 0AA2 0AA3 2722 2723

0980 0981 2432 2433 0A12 0A13 2578 2579 0AA4 0AA5 2724 2725

0982 0983 2434 2435 0A14 0A15 2580 2581 0AA6 0AA7 2726 2727

0984 0985 2436 2437 0A16 0A17 2582 2583 0AA8 0AA9 2728 2729

0986 0987 2438 2439 0A18 0A19 2584 2585 0AAA 0AAB 2730 2731

0988 0989 2440 2441 0A1A 0A1B 2586 2587 0AAC 0AAD 2732 2733

098A 098B 2442 2443 0A1C 0A1D 2588 2589 0AAE 0AAF 2734 2735

098C 098D 2444 2445 0A1E 0A1F 2590 2591 0AB0 0AB1 2736 2737

098E 098F 2446 2447 0A20 0A21 2592 2593 0AB2 0AB3 2738 2739

IMR03D07-E1 6-93



No.

Name


8




10




Register address

HEX DEC



Register address

HEX DEC


Register address

HEX DEC




0AB4 0AB5

0AB6 0AB7

2740

2742

2741

2743

0B46

0B48

0B47

0B49

2886

2888

2887 0BD8 0BD9 3032

2889 0BDA 0BDB 3034

3033

3035

3 Set value (SV) of differential temperature input 0AB8 0AB9 2744 2745 0B4A 0B4B 2890 2891 0BDC 0BDD 3036 3037

4




0ABA 0ABB 2746

0ABC 0ABD 2748

2747

2749

0B4C 0B4D

0B4E 0B4F

2892

2894

2893 0BDE 0BDF 3038

2895 0BE0 0BE1 3040

3039

3041

6



0ABE 0ABF 2750 2751 0B50 0B51 2896 2897 0BE2 0BE3 3042 3043

0AC0 0AC1 2752 2753 0B52 0B53 2898 2899 0BE4 0BE5 3044 3045

0AC2 0AC3

0AC4 0AC5

0AC6 0AC7

2754

2756

2758

2755

2757

2759

0B54

0B56

0B58

0B55

0B57

0B59

2900

2902

2904

2901

2903

0BE6 0BE7

0BE8 0BE9

3046

3048

2905 0BEA 0BEB 3050

3047

3049

3051







0AC8 0AC9 2760 2761 0B5A 0B5B 2906 2907 0BEC 0BED 3052 3053

0ACA 0ACB 2762 2763 0B5C 0B5D 2908 2909 0BEE 0BEF 3054 3055

0ACC 0ACD 2764 2765 0B5E 0B5F 2910 2911 0BF0 0BF1 3056 3057

0ACE 0ACF 2766 2767 0B60 0B61 2912 2913 0BF2 0BF3 3058 3059

0AD0 0AD1 2768 2769 0B62 0B63 2914 2915 0BF4 0BF5 3060 3061

0AD2 0AD3 2770 2771 0B64 0B65 2916 2917 0BF6 0BF7 3062 3063




0AD4 0AD5 2772 2773 0B66 0B67 2918 2919 0BF8 0BF9 3064 3065

0AD6 0AD7 2774 2775 0B68 0B69 2920 2921 0BFA 0BFB 3066 3067

0AD8 0AD9 2776 2777 0B6A 0B6B 2922 2923 0BFC 0BFD 3068 3069

20 Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] 0ADA 0ADB 2778 2779 0B6C 0B6D 2924 2925 0BFE 0BFF 3070 3071

21 Input 1_Control loop break alarm (LBA) time 0ADC 0ADD 2780 2781 0B6E 0B6F 2926 2927 0C00 0C01 3072 3073

22 Input 1_LBA deadband (LBD) 0ADE 0ADF 2782 2783 0B70 0B71 2928 2929 0C02 0C03 3074 3075



0AE0 0AE1 2784 2785 0B72 0B73 2930 2931 0C04 0C05 3076 3077

0AE2 0AE3 2786 2787 0B74 0B75 2932 2933 0C06 0C07 3078 3079







0AE4 0AE5 2788 2789 0B76 0B77 2934 2935 0C08 0C09 3080 3081

0AE6 0AE7 2790 2791 0B78 0B79 2936 2937 0C0A 0C0B 3082 3083

0AE8 0AE9 2792 2793 0B7A 0B7B 2938 2939 0C0C 0C0D 3084 3085

0AEA 0AEB 2794 2795 0B7C 0B7D 2940 2941 0C0E 0C0F 3086 3087

0AEC 0AED 2796 2797 0B7E 0B7F 2942 2943 0C10 0C11 3088 3089

0AEE 0AEF 2798 2799 0B80 0B81 2944 2945 0C12 0C13 3090 3091

31 Input 2_Output limiter low 0AF0 0AF1 2800 2801 0B82 0B83 2946 2947 0C14 0C15 3092 3093

32 Input 2_Control loop break alarm (LBA) time 0AF2 0AF3 2802 2803 0B84 0B85 2948 2949 0C16 0C17 3094 3095

33 Input 2_LBA deadband (LBD) 0AF4 0AF5 2804 2805 0B86 0B87 2950 2951 0C18 0C19 3096 3097





38




0AF6 0AF7 2806 2807 0B88 0B89 2952 2953 0C1A 0C1B 3098 3099

0AF8 0AF9 2808 2809 0B8A 0B8B 2954 2955 0C1C 0C1D 3100 3101

0AFA 0AFB 2810

0AFC 0AFD 2812

0AFE 0AFF 2814

2811

2813

2815

0B8C 0B8D

0B8E 0B8F

0B90 0B91

2956

2958

2960

2957

2959

2961

0C1E 0C1F

0C20

0C22

0C21

0C23

3102

3104

3106

3103

3105

3107

0B00 0B01 2816 2817 0B92 0B93 2962 2963 0C24 0C25 3108 3109

40 Select Trigger type for Memory area transfer 0B02 0B03 2818 2819 0B94 0B95 2964 2965 0C26 0C27 3110 3111

41 Area soak time 0B04 0B05 2820 2821 0B96 0B97 2966 2967 0C28 0C29 3112 3113

42 Link area number



0B06 0B07 2822 2823 0B98 0B99 2968 2969 0C2A 0C2B 3114 3115

0B08 0B09 2824 2825 0B9A 0B9B 2970 2971 0C2C 0C2D 3116 3117

0B0A 0B0B 2826 2827 0B9C 0B9D 2972 2973 0C2E 0C2F 3118 3119

45 Input 1_Auto/Manual transfer selection (Area) 0B0C 0B0D 2828 2829 0B9E 0B9F 2974 2975 0C30 0C31 3120 3121

46 Input 1_Manipulated output value (Area) 0B0E 0B0F 2830 2831 0BA0 0BA1 2976 2977 0C32 0C33 3122 3123

47 Input 2_Setting change rate limiter (up) 0B10 0B11 2832 2833 0BA2 0BA3 2978 2979 0C34 0C35 3124 3125

48 Input 2_Setting change rate limiter (down) 0B12 0B13 2834 2835 0BA4 0BA5 2980 2981 0C36 0C37 3126 3127

6-94

IMR03D07-E1



No.

Name


Register address

HEX DEC



Register address

HEX DEC


Register address

HEX DEC


49 Input 2_Auto/Manual transfer selection (Area) 0B14 0B15 2836 2837 0BA6 0BA7 2982 2983 0C38 0C39 3128 3129

50 Input 2_Manipulated output value (Area) 0B16 0B17 2838 2839 0BA8 0BA9 2984 2985 0C3A 0C3B 3130 3131
























0B18 0B19 2840 2841 0BAA 0BAB 2986 2987 0C3C 0C3D 3132 3133

0B1A 0B1B 2842 2843 0BAC 0BAD 2988 2989 0C3E 0C3F 3134 3135

0B1C 0B1D 2844 2845 0BAE 0BAF 2990 2991 0C40 0C41 3136 3137

0B1E 0B1F 2846 2847 0BB0 0BB1 2992 2993 0C42 0C43 3138 3139

0B20 0B21 2848 2849 0BB2 0BB3 2994 2995 0C44 0C45 3140 3141

0B22 0B23 2850 2851 0BB4 0BB5 2996 2997 0C46 0C47 3142 3143

0B24 0B25 2852 2853 0BB6 0BB7 2998 2999 0C48 0C49 3144 3145

0B26 0B27 2854 2855 0BB8 0BB9 3000 3001 0C4A 0C4B 3146 3147

0B28 0B29 2856 2857 0BBA 0BBB 3002 3003 0C4C 0C4D 3148 3149

0B2A 0B2B 2858 2859 0BBC 0BBD 3004 3005 0C4E 0C4F 3150 3151

0B2C 0B2D 2860 2861 0BBE 0BBF 3006 3007 0C50 0C51 3152 3153

0B2E 0B2F 2862 2863 0BC0 0BC1 3008 3009 0C52 0C53 3154 3155

0B30 0B31 2864 2865 0BC2 0BC3 3010 3011 0C54 0C55 3156 3157

0B32 0B33 2866 2867 0BC4 0BC5 3012 3013 0C56 0C57 3158 3159

0B34 0B35 2868 2869 0BC6 0BC7 3014 3015 0C58 0C59 3160 3161

0B36 0B37 2870 2871 0BC8 0BC9 3016 3017 0C5A 0C5B 3162 3163

0B38 0B39 2872 2873 0BCA 0BCB 3018 3019 0C5C 0C5D 3164 3165

0B3A 0B3B 2874 2875 0BCC 0BCD 3020 3021 0C5E 0C5F 3166 3167

0B3C 0B3D 2876 2877 0BCE 0BCF 3022 3023 0C60 0C61 3168 3169

0B3E 0B3F 2878 2879 0BD0 0BD1 3024 3025 0C62 0C63 3170 3171

0B40 0B41 2880 2881 0BD2 0BD3 3026 3027 0C64 0C65 3172 3173

0B42 0B43 2882 2883 0BD4 0BD5 3028 3029 0C66 0C67 3174 3175

0B44 0B45 2884 2885 0BD6 0BD7 3030 3031 0C68 0C69 3176 3177

IMR03D07-E1 6-95



No.

Name


8




10




Register address

HEX DEC



Register address

HEX DEC


Register address

HEX DEC




0C6A 0C6B

0C6C 0C6D

3178

3180

3179

3181

0CFC 0CFD 3324

0CFE 0CFF 3326

3325

3327

0D8E 0D8F

0D90 0D91

3470

3472

3471

3473

3 Set value (SV) of differential temperature input 0C6E 0C6F 3182 3183 0D00 0D01 3328 3329 0D92 0D93 3474 3475

4




0C70

0C72

0C71

0C73

3184

3186

3185

3187

0D02 0D03

0D04 0D05

3330

3332

3331

3333

0D94 0D95

0D96 0D97

3476

3478

3477

3479

6



0C74 0C75 3188 3189 0D06 0D07 3334 3335 0D98 0D99 3480 3481

0C76 0C77 3190 3191 0D08 0D09 3336 3337 0D9A 0D9B 3482 3483

0C78 0C79

0C7A 0C7B

0C7C 0C7D

3192

3194

3196

3193 0D0A 0D0B

3195

3197

0D0C 0D0D 3340

0D0E 0D0F

3338

3342

3339

3341

0D9C 0D9D 3484

0D9E 0D9F 3486

3343 0DA0 0DA1 3488

3485

3487

3489







0C7E 0C7F 3198 3199 0D10 0D11 3344 3345 0DA2 0DA3 3490 3491

0C80 0C81 3200 3201 0D12 0D13 3346 3347 0DA4 0DA5 3492 3493

0C82 0C83 3202 3203 0D14 0D15 3348 3349 0DA6 0DA7 3494 3495

0C84 0C85 3204 3205 0D16 0D17 3350 3351 0DA8 0DA9 3496 3497

0C86 0C87 3206 3207 0D18 0D19 3352 3353 0DAA 0DAB 3498 3499

0C88 0C89 3208 3209 0D1A 0D1B 3354 3355 0DAC 0DAD 3500 3501




0C8A 0C8B 3210 3211 0D1C 0D1D 3356 3357 0DAE 0DAF 3502 3503

0C8C 0C8D 3212 3213 0D1E 0D1F 3358 3359 0DB0 0DB1 3504 3505

0C8E 0C8F 3214 3215 0D20 0D21 3360 3361 0DB2 0DB3 3506 3507

20 Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] 0C90 0C91 3216 3217 0D22 0D23 3362 3363 0DB4 0DB5 3508 3509

21 Input 1_Control loop break alarm (LBA) time 0C92 0C93 3218 3219 0D24 0D25 3364 3365 0DB6 0DB7 3510 3511

22 Input 1_LBA deadband (LBD) 0C94 0C95 3220 3221 0D26 0D27 3366 3367 0DB8 0DB9 3512 3513



0C96 0C97 3222 3223 0D28 0D29 3368 3369 0DBA 0DBB 3514 3515

0C98 0C99 3224 3225 0D2A 0D2B 3370 3371 0DBC 0DBD 3516 3517







0C9A 0C9B 3226 3227 0D2C 0D2D 3372 3373 0DBE 0DBF 3518 3519

0C9C 0C9D 3228 3229 0D2E 0D2F 3374 3375 0DC0 0DC1 3520 3521

0C9E 0C9F 3230 3231 0D30 0D31 3376 3377 0DC2 0DC3 3522 3523

0CA0 0CA1 3232 3233 0D32 0D33 3378 3379 0DC4 0DC5 3524 3525

0CA2 0CA3 3234 3235 0D34 0D35 3380 3381 0DC6 0DC7 3526 3527

0CA4 0CA5 3236 3237 0D36 0D37 3382 3383 0DC8 0DC9 3528 3529

31 Input 2_Output limiter low 0CA6 0CA7 3238 3239 0D38 0D39 3384 3385 0DCA 0DCB 3530 3531

32 Input 2_Control loop break alarm (LBA) time 0CA8 0CA9 3240 3241 0D3A 0D3B 3386 3387 0DCC 0DCD 3532 3533

33 Input 2_LBA deadband (LBD) 0CAA 0CAB 3242 3243 0D3C 0D3D 3388 3389 0DCE 0DCF 3534 3535





38




0CAC 0CAD 3244 3245 0D3E 0D3F 3390 3391 0DD0 0DD1 3536 3537

0CAE 0CAF 3246 3247 0D40 0D41 3392 3393 0DD2 0DD3 3538 3539

0CB0 0CB1

0CB2 0CB3

0CB4 0CB5

3248

3250

3252

3249

3251

3253

0D42 0D43

0D44 0D45

0D46 0D47

3394

3396

3398

3395 0DD4 0DD5 3540

3397 0DD6 0DD7 3542

3399 0DD8 0DD9 3544

3541

3543

3545

0CB6 0CB7 3254 3255 0D48 0D49 3400 3401 0DDA 0DDB 3546 3547

40 Select Trigger type for Memory area transfer 0CB8 0CB9 3256 3257 0D4A 0D4B 3402 3403 0DDC 0DDD 3548 3549

41 Area soak time 0CBA 0CBB 3258 3259 0D4C 0D4D 3404 3405 0DDE 0DDF 3550 3551

42 Link area number



0CBC 0CBD 3260 3261 0D4E 0D4F 3406 3407 0DE0 0DE1 3552 3553

0CBE 0CBF 3262 3263 0D50 0D51 3408 3409 0DE2 0DE3 3554 3555

0CC0 0CC1 3264 3265 0D52 0D53 3410 3411 0DE4 0DE5 3556 3557

45 Input 1_Auto/Manual transfer selection (Area) 0CC2 0CC3 3266 3267 0D54 0D55 3412 3413 0DE6 0DE7 3558 3559

46 Input 1_Manipulated output value (Area) 0CC4 0CC5 3268 3269 0D56 0D57 3414 3415 0DE8 0DE9 3560 3561

47 Input 2_Setting change rate limiter (up) 0CC6 0CC7 3270 3271 0D58 0D59 3416 3417 0DEA 0DEB 3562 3563

48 Input 2_Setting change rate limiter (down) 0CC8 0CC9 3272 3273 0D5A 0D5B 3418 3419 0DEC 0DED 3564 3565

6-96

IMR03D07-E1



No.

Name


Register address

HEX DEC



Register address

HEX DEC


Register address

HEX DEC


49 Input 2_Auto/Manual transfer selection (Area) 0CCA 0CCB 3274 3275 0D5C 0D5D 3420 3421 0DEE 0DEF 3566 3567

50 Input 2_Manipulated output value (Area) 0CCC 0CCD 3276 3277 0D5E 0D5F 3422 3423 0DF0 0DF1 3568 3569
























0CCE 0CCF 3278 3279 0D60 0D61 3424 3425 0DF2 0DF3 3570 3571

0CD0 0CD1 3280 3281 0D62 0D63 3426 3427 0DF4 0DF5 3572 3573

0CD2 0CD3 3282 3283 0D64 0D65 3428 3429 0DF6 0DF7 3574 3575

0CD4 0CD5 3284 3285 0D66 0D67 3430 3431 0DF8 0DF9 3576 3577

0CD6 0CD7 3286 3287 0D68 0D69 3432 3433 0DFA 0DFB 3578 3579

0CD8 0CD9 3288 3289 0D6A 0D6B 3434 3435 0DFC 0DFD 3580 3581

0CDA 0CDB 3290 3291 0D6C 0D6D 3436 3437 0DFE 0DFF 3582 3583

0CDC 0CDD 3292 3293 0D6E 0D6F 3438 3439 0E00 0E01 3584 3585

0CDE 0CDF 3294 3295 0D70 0D71 3440 3441 0E02 0E03 3586 3587

0CE0 0CE1 3296 3297 0D72 0D73 3442 3443 0E04 0E05 3588 3589

0CE2 0CE3 3298 3299 0D74 0D75 3444 3445 0E06 0E07 3590 3591

0CE4 0CE5 3300 3301 0D76 0D77 3446 3447 0E08 0E09 3592 3593

0CE6 0CE7 3302 3303 0D78 0D79 3448 3449 0E0A 0E0B 3594 3595

0CE8 0CE9 3304 3305 0D7A 0D7B 3450 3451 0E0C 0E0D 3596 3597

0CEA 0CEB 3306 3307 0D7C 0D7D 3452 3453 0E0E 0E0F 3598 3599

0CEC 0CED 3308 3309 0D7E 0D7F 3454 3455 0E10 0E11 3600 3601

0CEE 0CEF 3310 3311 0D80 0D81 3456 3457 0E12 0E13 3602 3603

0CF0 0CF1 3312 3313 0D82 0D83 3458 3459 0E14 0E15 3604 3605

0CF2 0CF3 3314 3315 0D84 0D85 3460 3461 0E16 0E17 3606 3607

0CF4 0CF5 3316 3317 0D86 0D87 3462 3463 0E18 0E19 3608 3609

0CF6 0CF7 3318 3319 0D88 0D89 3464 3465 0E1A 0E1B 3610 3611

0CF8 0CF9 3320 3321 0D8A 0D8B 3466 3467 0E1C 0E1D 3612 3613

0CFA 0CFB 3322 3323 0D8C 0D8D 3468 3469 0E1E 0E1F 3614 3615

IMR03D07-E1 6-97

6.3.3 Data mapping address [Modbus double word]

Necessary data can be read/written at one time by assigning any desired data (max. 32) continuously.




Register address for data designation

No. Name


1 Register address setting 1 [Read/write address:











Low-order word 150AH, high-order word 150BH]


Low-order word 150CH, high-order word 150DH]


Low-order word 150EH, high-order word 150FH]









Registeraddress bute

1014 1015 4116 4117 R/W

1016 1017 4118 4119 R/W

Data range

1000 1001 4096 4097 R/W

1002 1003 4098 4099 R/W

1004 1005 4100 4101 R/W

1006 1007 4102 4103 R/W

1008 1009 4104 4105 R/W

100A 100B 4106 4107 R/W

100C 100D 4108 4109 R/W

100E 100F 4110 4111 R/W

1010 1011 4112 4113 R/W

Set the register address of data to be assigned to 1500H to

153FH

Decimal number:

 1 to 20479

(  1: Without mapping)

Hexadecimal numeral:

FFFFH to 4FFFH

(FFFFH: Without mapping)

The register addresses for data designation (1000H to 103FH) and read/write (1500H to 153FH) will be invalid (without mapping), even if set.

1012 1013 4114 4115 R/W

Factory set value

























1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

No. Name
































Registeraddress bute

102C 102D 4140 4141 R/W

102E 102F 4142 4143 R/W

1030 1031 4144 4145 R/W

1032 1033 4146 4147 R/W

1034 1035 4148 4149 R/W

Data range

1018 1019 4120 4121 R/W

101A 101B 4122 4123 R/W

101C 101D 4124 4125 R/W

101E 101F 4126 4127 R/W

1020 1021 4128 4129 R/W

1022 1023 4130 4131 R/W

1024 1025 4132 4133 R/W

1026 1027 4134 4135 R/W

1028 1029 4136 4137 R/W

Set the register address of data to be assigned to 1500H to

153FH

Decimal number:

 1 to 20479



FFFFH to 4FFFH



102A 102B 4138 4139 R/W

Factory set value































1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

Registeraddress

No. Name











Low-order word 153EH, high-order word 153FH] bute

1038 1039 4152 4153 R/W

103A 103B 4154 4155 R/W

103C 103D 4156 4157 R/W

103E 103F 4158 4159 R/W

Data range

153FH

Decimal number:

 1 to 20479



FFFFH to 4FFFH



Factory set value











1

1

1

1

1



Register address for data read/write

Registeraddress

No. Name


1 Data specified Register address setting 1

(Low-order word 1000H, high-order word 1001H)










(Low-order word 100AH, high-order word 100BH)


(Low-order word 100CH, high-order word 100DH)


(Low-order word 100EH, high-order word 100FH)

















1500 1501 5376 5377

1502 1503 5378 5379

1504 1505 5380 5381

1506 1507 5382 5383

1508 1509 5384 5385

150A 150B 5386 5387

150C 150D 5388 5389

150E 150F 5390 5391

1510 1511 5392 5393

1512 1513 5394 5395

1514 1515 5396 5397

1516 1517 5398 5399

1518 1519 5400 5401

151A 151B 5402 5403

151C 151D 5404 5405

151E 151F 5406 5407 bute

Data range

Based on the data specified at 1000H to 103FH.

Factory set value

Registeraddress

No. Name


































1520 1521 5408 5409

1522 1523 5410 5411

1524 1525 5412 5413

1526 1527 5414 5415

1528 1529 5416 5417

152A 152B 5418 5419

152C 152D 5420 5421

152E 152F 5422 5423

1530 1531 5424 5425

1532 1533 5426 5427

1534 1535 5428 5429

1536 1537 5430 5431

1538 1539 5432 5433

153A 153B 5434 5435

153C 153D 5436 5437

153E 153F 5438 5439 bute

Data range


Factory set value

6.3.4 HA series equivalent communication data [RKC communication identifier/Modbus double word]

Below is a table of the HA series equivalent RKC communication identifiers and register address of Modbus.

The “HA series equivalent communication data” means the data of our HA series controllers compatible with the data of GZ400/900.

The data is HA series equivalent when the Input data type is set to “2.”


No. Name





3 Dummy data

(Feedback resistance input value monitor)


[Current transformer input value 1

(CT1) monitor]


[Current transformer input value 2

(CT2) monitor]


[Input 1_set value (SV1) monitor]


[Input 2_set value (SV2) monitor]

M1

M0

M2

M3

M4

MS

MT

Digits

7

7

7

7

7

Register address

HEX DEC

0008 0009 8 9

Data range


0000 0001 0 1

0002

0004

0003

0005

2

4

3

5







0006 0007 6 7 RO 0.0 to 100.0 A

In case of Input data type “2,” it is “Second current transformer input value (CT2)” of our REX-D equivalent parameter.

RO 0.0 to 100.0 A



Factory set value





0









No. Name


[Remote input value monitor]

9 Dummy data

(Cascade monitor)

S2

KH


[Input 1_burnout state]


[Input 2_burnout state]

12 Dummy data

(Feedback resistance input burnout state)


[Event 1 state]


[Event 2 state]


[Event 3 state]


[Event 4 state]


[Heater break alarm 1 (HBA1) state]


[Heater break alarm 2 (HBA2) state]

19 Input 1_Manipulated output value monitor [heat-side]

[Input 1_manipulated output value

(MV1) monitor]

B1

B0

B2

AA

AB

AC

AD

AE

AF

O1

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


7

7

0010

0016

0011

0017

16

22

Data range


17 R/W The read data is “0.”


1: ON

1: ON

23 R/W The read data is “0.”


1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

0025 36 37 RO 5.0 to  105.0 %

Factory set value



0





0















No. Name


[Input 2_manipulated output value

(MV2) monitor]

O0

ER

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


0027 38 39 RO 5.0 to  105.0 %

7 0028 0029 40 41

Data range

RO 0 to 71

Normal

 1: Adjustment data error

 2: Data back-up error

 4: A/D conversion error

(Temperature compensation error included)

 64: Display units error


22 DI state monitor

[Event input (DI) state]

L1

The DI state is assigned as a bit image in binary numbers.

Bit 0: DI1

Bit 1: DI2

Bit 2: DI3

Bit 3: DI4

Bit 4: DI5

Bit 5: DI6


Data 0: Open 1: Closed

Modbus

0 to 63

 1: DI1 Closed

 2: DI2 Closed

 4: DI3 Closed

 8: DI4 Closed

 16: DI5 Closed

 32: DI6 Closed


Factory set value





No. Name


[Operation mode state]

L0

Digits

7

Register address

HEX DEC


002C 002D 44 45 RO 0 to 511

Data range

 1: STOP state



 8: Remote mode state

( Differential temperature control

state, Input 2 state of Control with PV select)





 256: Communication monitoring result


Factory set value



No. Name



[Input 1_PID/AT transfer]


[Input 2_PID/AT transfer]



TR

G1

G0

J1

J0

Digits

7

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


002E 002F 46 47 RO In case of Input data type 0 or 2





0.00 seconds to 59.99 seconds (Calculation is performed every 50 ms.)

 Modbus

0 to 35999 seconds

0 to 5999 minutes

0 to 11999 seconds









0 to 5999 minutes

0 to 11999 seconds



0031 48 49 R/W control

1: Start Autotuning


0033 50 51 R/W control

1: Start Autotuning


0035 52 53 R/W mode

1: Manual mode

0037 54 55 R/W mode

1: Manual mode

Factory set value





0

0

0

0

No. Name


[Memory area selection]

C1

SR

ZA

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range

7

7

7


0038 0039 56

003A 003B

003C 003D

58

60

57 R/W When Select function for input 2 is: “Remote setting input”

0: Local mode

1: Remote mode


0: Input 1

1: Input 2

When “Switching by level” is selected at “Selection of PV select trigger,” the parameter becomes RO (Read only).


0: 2-loop control


59 R/W 0: RUN (Control start)

1: STOP (Control stop)

61 R/W 1 to 16


(Without area set signal)” and when “External mode” is selected with the Control area Local/External transfer, the data is RO (Read only).

Factory set value

0

0

0

0

1

No. Name


[Event 1 set value]

When Event 1 type is either high or low limit with individual setting:


★

A1

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


Data range



















 5.0 to  105.0 %

65 R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1)/Event 1 set value (EV1) [high] 33 Event 2 set value (EV2)

[Event 2 set value]

A2 7 0040



★


0041 64

Factory set value

TC/RTD inputs:

10

V/I inputs:

5 % of input span

50.0

No. Name Digits

7

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


0042 0043 66 67 R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1)/Event 1 set value (EV1) [high] 34 Event 3 set value (EV3)

[Event 3 set value]



★


(LBA) time

[Control loop break alarm 1

(LBA1) time] ★


[LBA1 deadband]

★


[Event 4 set value]

A3

A5

N1

A4

7

7

7

0044

0046

0048

0045

0047

0049

68

70

72



★


(LBA) time

[Control loop break alarm 2

(LBA2) time] ★

A6 7 004A 004B


74

69 R/W 0 to 7200 seconds

0: No function

71 R/W 0 to Input 1_Input span

73

75



R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1)/Event 1 set value (EV1) [high]


0: No function

Factory set value



0



No. Name


[LBA2 deadband] ★


[Input 1_set value (SV1)] ★


[heat-side]

[Input 1_proportional band]

★

45

[heat-side]

[Input 1_integral time]


[heat-side]

[Input 1_derivative time] parameter

Unused

★

★

★

N2

S1

P1

I1

D1

CA



Digits

7

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


004C 004D 76 77 R/W 0 to Input 2_Input span


7

7


0052 0053 82







0 (0.0, 0.00): ON/OFF action

83 R/W 0 to 3600 seconds, 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds, 0.00 to 360.00 seconds or

0.000 to 36.000 seconds

0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PD action


0054 0055 84 85 R/W 0 to 3600 seconds, 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds, 0.00 to 360.00 seconds or

0.000 to 36.000 seconds

0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PI action


0057 86 87 R/W Slow

1: Medium

2: Fast


 0058 0059 88


[Input 2_set value (SV2)] ★

S0 7 005A 005B


90

89  

91 R/W Input 2_Setting limiter low to Input 2_Setting limiter high


Factory set value

0

0

TC/RTD inputs:

30

V/I inputs:

3.0

240.00

60.00

PID control:

0


2



0

No. Name


49 Input 2_Derivative time parameter

★

★

★

★

P0

I0

D0

C9

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


Data range

7

TC/RTD





0 (0.0, 0.00): ON/OFF action

005E 005F 94 95 R/W 0 to 3600 seconds, 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds, 0.00 to 360.00 seconds or

0.000 to 36.000 seconds

0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PD action


7 0060 0061 96 97 R/W 0 to 3600 seconds, 0.0 to 3600.0 seconds, 0.00 to 360.00 seconds or

0.000 to 36.000 seconds

0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PI action


0063 98 99 R/W Slow

1: Medium

2: Fast


 0064 0065 100 101   51 Unused 




★

★

HH

HL

HX

7

7

7



0: No function




0: No function


006A 006B

★


106 107 R/W 0 to Input 2_Input span

0: No function


Factory set value

TC/RTD inputs:

30

V/I inputs:

3.0

240.00

60.00

0



0

0

0

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


56 Area soak time



60 Input 1_PV bias

★

★

★

HY

TM

LP

A7

A8

PB

7

7

7

7

7



0: No function


006E 006F 110 111 R/W In case of Input data type 0 or 2






 Modbus

0 to 35999 seconds

0 to 5999 minutes

0 to 11999 seconds









0 to 5999 minutes

0 to 11999 seconds



0070 0071 112 113 R/W 0 to 16

0: No function

0072 0073 114 115 R/W 0.0 to 100.0 A


0074 0075 116 117 R/W 0.0 to 100.0 A


0077 118 119 R/W  (Input 1_Input span)





Factory set value

0

RKC communication:

0:00

(0.00 seconds)

Modbus:

0

RKC communication:

0:00

(0.00 seconds)

Modbus:

0

0

0.0

0.0

0

No. Name


62 Input 1_PV ratio


F1

PR

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC

7


0078 0079 120 121 R/W 0.00 to 10.00 seconds

0.00: Filter OFF

7 007A 007B 122 123 R/W 0.500 to 1.500


0.00

1.000


[Input 1_proportional cycle time] output value

[Input 1_manual output value]

66 Input 2_PV bias

(RS bias)


(RS digital filter)

DP

T0

ON

PA

F0

7

7

7

007C 007D 124 125 R/W 0.00 to 25.00 % of Input 1_Input span


0.00

007E 007F 126 127 output:

20.0


Transistor output:

Note1

Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] to Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side]

Heat/Cool PID control *

 (Input 1_Output limiter high [cool-side]) to +(Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side])

0083 130 131 R/W  (Input 2_Input span)


RS bias is selected by selecting “Remote setting input” at Select function for input 2.

0084 0085 132 133 R/W 0.00 to 10.00 seconds

0.00: Filter OFF

RS digital filter is selected by selecting “Remote setting input” at

Select function for input 2.

PID control:

 5.0


0.0

0

0.00

Note1: In case OUT1 function selection is “Input 1_Control output [cool-side]” AND Inpu1_Control action is “Heat/Cool PID control [air cooling] or [water cooling]”: 20.0, Other casees: 2.0

* In case of Heat/Cool PID control, the data range has such exceptional conditions as shown below.

(1) Input 1_Output limiter high [cool-side] is  0.0 %

 Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] is  0.0 %: 0.0 % to +(Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side])

 Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] is  0.0 %: Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] to Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side]

(2) Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side]  0.0 %

 Input 1_Output limiter low [cool-side] is  0.0 %:  (Input 1_Output limiter high [cool-side]) to 0.0 %

 Input 1_Output limiter low [cool-side] is  0.0 %:  (Input 1_Output limiter high [cool-side]) to  (Input 1_Output limiter low [cool-side])

(3) Fixed at 0.0% in the following cases: Input 1_Output limiter high [cool-side]  0.0 %, AND Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side]  0.0 %

No. Name

68 Input 2_PV ratio

(RS ratio)



[Input 2_proportional cycle time]

PQ

DO

T2

Digits

7

7

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


0086 0087 134 135 R/W Input 2_PV ratio: 0.500 to 1.500

RS ratio: 0.001 to 9.999

RS ratio is selected by selecting “Remote setting input” at Select function for input 2.

0088 0089 136 137 R/W 0.00 to 25.00 % of Input 2_Input span

7 008A 008B 138 139 R/W 0.1 to 100.0 seconds

Factory set value

1.000

OM 7 008C 008D 140 141 R/W Input 2_ Output limiter low to Input 2_Output limiter high

0.00


20.0


Transistor output:

Note1

 5.0 output value

[Input 2_manual output value]

72 Set lock level LK 00000

The Set lock level is assigned as a bit image in binary numbers.

Bit 0: SV setting mode *  Parameter select mode

Bit 1: Operation transfer mode

Bit 2: Parameter setting mode

Bit 3 Setup setting mode

Bit 4 Engineering mode


Data 0: Unlock 1: Lock


Modbus

0 to 31

0

 1: SV setting mode *  Parameter select mode

 2: Operation transfer mode

 4: Parameter setting mode

 8: Setup setting mode

 16: Engineering mode


Note1: In case OUT2 function selection is “Input 1_Control output [cool-side]” AND Inpu1_Control action is “Heat/Cool PID control [air cooling] or [water cooling]”: 20.0, Other casees: 2.0

No. Name

73 Dummy data

(EEPROM storage state)

74 Dummy data

(EEPROM storage mode)

75 Dummy data

76 Dummy data

(Heater melting determination point 1)

77 Dummy data

(Heater break determination point 2)

78 Dummy data



(Heater break determination point 1)

(Heater melting determination point 2)

Unused


80 Dummy data

(Bar-graph display selection)

81 Dummy data

(Bar graph resolution setting)

82 Unused

83 Dummy data

(Auto/Manual transfer key operation selection (A/M))

EM

EB

NE

NF

NH

NI



DX

DA

DE



DK

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range

7

7

7

7


0090 0091 144 145 R/W The read data is “0.”








7

7 009A 009B 154 155 R/W The read data is “0.”






009C

01FE

009D

01FF

156

510

157

511

 

7

7

0200 0201 512 513 R/W 0: Stop on PV display

1: Stop on SV display

2: Stop on MV display



7 0204 0205 516 517 R/W The read data is “0.”


 0206 0207 518 519  



Factory set value

0

0

0

0

0

0



1

0

0



0

No. Name

84 Dummy data

(Remote/Local transfer key operation selection (R/L))

85 Dummy data

(RUN/STOP transfer key operation selection (R/S))


[Input 1_input type selection]

[Input 1_display unit selection]

DL

DM

XI

PU

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range




7 020C 020D 524 525 R/W The read data is “0.”


7 020E 020F 526 527 R/W 0: TC input K

1: TC input J

2: TC input R

3: TC input S

4: TC input B

5: TC input E

13: RTD input Pt100






6: TC input N 19: Voltage input 1 to 5 V DC




10: TC input U

11: TC input L




0211 528 529 R/W  C

1:  F

Factory set value

0

0

Same as the input type of the input range code specified at the time of order.

Same as the display unit of the input range code specified at the time of order.

No. Name


[Input 1_decimal point position]


[Input 1_input scale high]


[Input 1_input scale low]



XU

XV

XW

AV

AW

Digits

7

7

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


0212 0213 530 531 R/W 0: No decimal place





TC input:



RTD input: 0 to 2





Decimal point position setting of Input 1 and Input 2 is compared and the smaller will be used.

0214 0215 532 533 R/W (Input 1_Input range low  1 digit) to Input 1_Maximum value of input range


7

7

7

0216

0218

0217

0219

021A 021B

534

536

538

535

537

539

R/W Input 1_Minimum value of input range to (Input 1_Input range high


R/W Input 1_Input error determination point (low) to Input 1_Input range high


R/W Input 1_Input range low 



 1 digit)


(Input 1_5 % of input span) * to Input 1_Input error determination point (high)



Ohms.

(Pt100: 245.5  C [  409.8  F], JPt100:  237.6  C [  395.7  F])

Factory set value

Same as the decimal point position of the input range code specified at the time of order.

For V/I inputs: 1

High limit value of the input range code specified at the time of order.

For V/I inputs: 100.0

Low limit value of the input range code specified at the time of order.

For V/I inputs: 0.0

Input 1_

Input range high 


Input 1_

Input range low 


No. Name



[Input 1_square root extraction selection]


[Power supply frequency selection]


[Input 2_input type selection]

BS

XH

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


JT

XJ 7

[Input 2_display unit selection]


PT

XT 7

1: Downscale

1: Used


0

0

0

0222 0223 546 547 R/W 0: TC input K

1: TC input J

2: TC input R

3: TC input S

4: TC input B

5: TC input E

6: TC input N

13: RTD input Pt100










10: TC input U 23: Voltage input 0 to 100 mV DC

11: TC input L



･ When Measured Input 2 is selected:0 to 24

･ When Remote setting input is selected:15 to 24

0225 548 549 R/W  C

1:  F

0226 0227 550 551 R/W 0: No decimal place 3: Three decimal places

1: One decimal place 4: Four decimal places


TC input:



RTD input: 0 to 2




Same as

Input 1_Input type

When Remote setting input is specified at the time of order, but the input type is not specified: 17

Same as


Same as


No. Name


[Input 2_input scale high]


[Input 2_input scale low]


XX

XY

AX

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


7 0228 0229 552 553 R/W TC/RTD inputs and Voltage (V)/Current (I) Inputs (For other than

Remote setting input):





7 022A 022B 554 555 R/W TC/RTD inputs and Voltage (V)/Current (I) Inputs (For other than

Remote setting input):





7 022C 022D 556 557 R/W Input 2_Input error determination point (low) to Input 2_Input range high  (Input 2_5 % of input span)





[Input 2_square root extraction selection]

AY

BR

XG

7 022E 022F 558 559 R/W Input 2_Input range low  (Input 2_5 % of input span) * to Input 2_Input error determination point (high)



Ohms.

(Pt100: 245.5  C [  409.8  F] , JPt100:  237.6  C [  395.7  F])

0231 560 561 R/W Upscale

1: Downscale

0233 562 563 R/W Unused

1: Used

Factory set value

Same as


Same as



 (Input 2_

5 % of input span)

Input 2_

Input range low

 (Input 2_

5 % of input span)

0

0

No. Name


[Event input logic selection]

H2

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


Data range












13: Set data unlock/lock transfer

14: Direct/Reverse action transfer






20: Area jump

Factory set value

Based on Model code

No. Name

106 OUT1 function selection

[Output logic selection]

E0

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


Data range

1: Input 1_Control output [heat-side]

2: Input 1_Control output [cool-side]

107 Event 1 timer

[Output 1 timer setting]

108 Event 2 timer


109 Event 3 timer


110 Event 4 timer


111 Dummy data

(Event 5 timer)


TD

TG

TH

TI

TJ

7

7

7

5: Logic calculation output

(Event, HBA, LBA, Input error)

6: RUN state output











15: FAIL output

0238 0239 568 569 R/W 0.0 to 600.0 seconds

7 023A 023B 570 571 R/W Same as Event 1 timer

7

023C 023D

023E

0240

023F

0241

572

574

576

573

575

577



RW The read data is “0.”


Factory set value

Based on Model code

0.0

0

No. Name


[Transmission output 1_type selection]

LA

Digits

7

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


0242 0243 578 579 R/W 0: No retransmission output


2: Input 1_Local SV


5: Input 1_Manipulated output value [heat-side]

6: Input 1_Manipulated output value [cool-side]


8: Input 2_Local SV



11: Input 2_Manipulated output value

12: Remote setting input value



15: Measured value (PV) of differential temperature input

Factory set value

0

No. Name scale high

[Transmission output 1_scale high]

HV

Digits

7

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


0244 0245 580 581 R/W No retransmission output, Input 1_Measured value (PV),






Input 1_Deviation






Input 2_Deviation




 5.0 to +105.0 %


0.0 to 100.0 %




Factory set value

No retransmission output, Input

1_Measured value

(PV), Input 1_Local

SV, Input 1_SV monitor value, and

Remote setting input value:


Control with PV select: PV select input range high

Input 1_Deviation:


Input 2_Measured value (PV), Input

2_Local SV, and Input

2_SV monitor value:


Input 2_Deviation:


Manipulated output value, and Current transformer (CT) input value:

100.0


100

No. Name


[Transmission output 1_scale low]

HW

Digits

7

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


0246 0247 582 583 R/W No retransmission output, Input 1_Measured value (PV),






Input 1_Deviation






Input 2_Deviation




 5.0 to +105.0 %


0.0 to 100.0 %




7 0248 0249 584 585 R/W Same as Retransmission output 1 type

Factory set value

No retransmission output, Input

1_Measured value

(PV), Input 1_Local

SV, Input 1_SV monitor value, and

Remote setting input value:


Control with PV select: PV select input range low

Input 1_Deviation:


Input 2_Measured value (PV),

Input 2_Local SV, and

Input 2_SV monitor value:


Input 2_Deviation:


Manipulated output value, and Current transformer (CT) input value:

0.0


 100

0 115 Retransmission output 2 type


LB

No. Name











121 Event 1 type

[Event 1 type selection]

CV

CW

LC

EV

EW

XA

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


7 024A 024B 586 587 R/W Same as Retransmission output 1 scale high

7

7

7

024C 024D

0250

0252

0251

0253

588

592

594

589

593

595

R/W Same as Retransmission output 1 scale low

R/W Same as Retransmission output 1 scale high

R/W Same as Retransmission output 1 scale low

0255 596 597 R/W

1: Deviation high (Using SV monitor value)

2: Deviation low (Using SV monitor value) a a

3: Deviation high/low (Using SV monitor value) a

4: Band (Using SV monitor value)

5: Deviation high/low (Using SV monitor value)

[High/Low individual setting] a a

6: Band (Using SV monitor value) [High/Low individual setting] a

7: SV high (Using SV monitor value)

8: SV low (Using SV monitor value)

9: Process high b

10: Process low b

11: Deviation high (Using local SV)

12: Deviation low (Using local SV) a a

13: Deviation high/low (Using local SV) a

14: Band (Using local SV) a

15: Deviation high/low (Using local SV)


16: Band (Using local SV) [High/Low individual setting] a

17: SV high (Using local SV)

18: SV low (Using local SV)

19: MV high [heat-side] b

20: MV low [heat-side] b

21: MV high [cool-side] b

22: MV low [cool-side] b

23: Process high/low [High/Low individual setting] b a

24: Process band [High/Low individual setting] b b

Event hold and re-hold action is available.

Event hold action is available.

Factory set value

1

If the Event type is specified by the initial setting code when ordering, that Event type will be the factory set value.


No. Name



124 Dummy data

(Event 1 action at input error)

WA

HA

OA

FA

XB

Digits

7

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


0256 0257 598 599 R/W 0: Hold action OFF

1: Hold action ON

2: Re-hold action ON

Setting hold or re-hold action on the event that is not available with hold and re-hold actions will just be ignored.

7 0258 0259 600 601 R/W Deviation, Process and SV:

 If event assignment is either Input 1 or Differential temperature.



 If event assignment is Input 2



MV:

0.0 to 110.0 %



Factory set value

If the Event type is specified by the initial setting code when ordering, the factory set value of Event hold action differs depending on the Event type.


Deviation, Process and SV:

TC/RTD inputs: 2

V/I inputs:

0.2 % of input span

MV: 0.2

0

1

7

2: Input 2

3: Differential temperature input

025E 025F 606 607 R/W Same as Event 1 type 126 Event 2 type




129 Dummy data


WB

HB

OB

FB

7

7

7

7

0260

0262

0261

0263

608

610

609

611





0266 0267 614 615 R/W Same as Event 1 assignment

0

No. Name

131 Event 3 type




134 Dummy data


XC

WC

HC

OC

FC

XD

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


7 0268 0269 616 617 R/W Same as Event 1 type

7 026A 026B 618 619 R/W Same as Event 1 hold action

Data range

7

7

7

7

026C 026D 620 621 R/W Same as Event 1 differential gap

026E 026F 622 623 R/W The read data is “0.”


0270 0271 624 625 R/W Same as Event 1 assignment

0272 0273 626 627 R/W Same as Event 1 type 136 Event 4 type




139 Dummy data


WD

HD

OD

FD

XR

ZF

XS

Factory set value

0

7

7

0274 0275 628 629 R/W Same as Event 1 hold action

0276 0277 630 631 R/W Same as Event 1 differential gap



7 027A 027B 634 635 R/W Same as Event 1 assignment

7 027C 027D 636 637 R/W 0 to 9999


CTL-6-P-N: 800

CTL-12-S56-10L-N: 1000

CTL-6-P-Z: 800

7

None

0280 0281 640 641 R/W 0 to 9999

CTL-6-P-Z:

3: OUT3


CTL-6-P-N: 800

800

0

If CTL-6-P-N or

CTL-6-P-Z is specified for the

Current transformer

(CT) type: 800

If CTL-12-S56-10L-N is specified for the

Current transformer

(CT) type: 1000

1

If CTL-6-P-N or

CTL-6-P-Z is specified for the

Current transformer

(CT) type: 800

If CTL-12-S56-10L-N is specified for the

Current transformer

(CT) type: 1000

No. Name

[Hot/Cold start selection]

146 Dummy data

(Input 2_use selection)

147 Dummy data

(Cascade ratio)

148 Dummy data

(Cascade bias)

[Input 1_control action type selection] decimal point position

[Input 1_integral/derivative time decimal point position selection]

152 Dummy data

(Input 1_derivative gain)

ZG

XN

KM

RR

RB

XL

XE

PK

DG

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


0283 642 643 R/W None

Data range

OUT1 3: OUT3

7

7

7

0284 0285 644 645 R/W 0: Hot/Cold start 1

1: Hot/Cold start 2

2: Cold start

3: STOP start







7 028C 028D 652 653 R/W 0 to 3

0: No SV tracking function

 1: SV tracking at transferring Remote/Local *

* Including 2-loop control/Differential temperature control transfer

 2: SV tracking at transferring Auto/Manual


7

7

028E 028F 654 655 R/W 0: Brilliant II PID control (direct action)


2: Brilliant II Heat/Cool PID control [water cooling]

3: Brilliant II Heat/Cool PID control [air cooling]

4: Brilliant II Heat/Cool PID control [Cooling linear type]

0290 0291 656 657 R/W 0: No decimal place






Factory set value

Based on Model code

0

0

0

0

1

Control action specified at the time of order.

2

0

No. Name




[Input 1_action at input error

(low)]

IV

IW

155 Input 1_Action (high) input error


(high)]

WH

WL

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


Data range













7 0298 0299 664 665 R/W 0: Control continues (with the latest output)








to the PID control.

7 029A 029B 666 667 R/W 0: Control continues (with the latest output)








to the PID control.

Factory set value

TC/RTD inputs:

1

V/I inputs:

0.1

TC/RTD inputs:

1

V/I inputs:

0.1

2

2

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range



[Input 1_manipulated output value at input error]

OE

PH 7

 5.0 to  105.0 %


 105.0 to  105.0 %

029E 029F 670 671 R/W 0.0 to 1000.0 %/seconds of manipulated output

0.0: OFF (up) [heat-side]

[Input 1_output change rate limiter (up)]

(down) [heat-side]

[Input 1_output change rate limiter (down)]


[heat-side]

[Input 1_output limiter (high)]

★


[cool-side]

[Input 1_output limiter (low)]

★

162


[heat-side]

[Input 1_output limiter (low)]

★

Dummy data

(Input 1_power feed forward selection)

PL

OH

OL

PF

7 02A0 02A1 672 673 R/W 0.0 to 1000.0 %/seconds of manipulated output

7

7

7

02A2 02A3

02A4 02A5

02A6 02A7

674

676

678

675

677

679

0.0: OFF

R/W Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] to 105.0 %

R/W Heat/Cool PID control

Input 1_Output limiter low [cool-side] to 105.0 %

PID control

 5.0 % to Input 1_Output limiter high [heat-side]




[Input 2_control action type selection]

164 Dummy data

(Input 2_integral/derivative time decimal point position selection)

XF

PJ

7 02A8 02A9 680 681 R/W 0: Brilliant II PID control (direct action)

7 02AA 02AB


682 683




Factory set value

PID control:

Same as Input 1_

Control action

0

 5.0


0.0

0.0

0.0

105.0

105.0

 5.0

0

No. Name

165 Dummy data

(Input 2_derivative gain)





(high)]



(low)]


[Input 2_manipulated output value at input error]

OF

DJ

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


7 02AC 02AD 684 685 R/W The read data is “0.”


IX





IY

WX

WY

7

7





02B2 02B3 690 691 R/W 0: Control continues (with the latest output)








to the PID control.

02B4 02B5 692 693 R/W 0: Control continues (with the latest output)








to the PID control.

02B7 694 695 R/W  105.0 %

Factory set value

0

TC/RTD inputs:

1

V/I inputs:

0.1

TC/RTD inputs:

1

V/I inputs:

0.1

2

2

 5.0

No. Name Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range

(up)

(down)

PX

PY


7 02B8 02B9 696 697 R/W 0.0 to 1000.0 %/seconds of manipulated output

0.0: No function

7 02BA 02BB 698 699 R/W 0.0 to 1000.0 %/seconds of manipulated output

0.0: No function

7 02BC 02BD 700 701 R/W Input 2_Output limiter low to 105.0 % 173 Input 2_Output limiter high

★


★

175 Dummy data

([Input 2_power feed forward selection)

176 Input 1_AT bias

178 Dummy data

(Input 1_AT differential gap time)

179 Input 2_AT bias

OX

OY

PG

GB

G3

GH

GA

G2

7 02C0 02C1 704 705 R/W The read data is “0.”


02C3 706 707 R/W  (Input 1_Input span)




7

7

02C4 02C5 708 709 R/W 0: 1.5 cycles

1: 2.0 cycles

2: 2.5 cycles

3: 3.0 cycles

Use to select the number of ON/OFF cycles used to calculate PID values during autotuning.

02C6 02C7 710 711 R/W The read data is “0.”


02C9 712 713 R/W  (Input 2_Input span)


7 02CA 02CB 714 715 R/W 0: 1.5 cycles

1: 2.0 cycles

2: 2.5 cycles

3: 3.0 cycles

Use to select the number of ON/OFF cycles used to calculate PID values during autotuning.


Factory set value



0.0

0.0

105.0

5.0

0

0

1

0

0

1

No. Name

181 Dummy data

(Input 2_AT differential gap time)

182 Dummy data

(Open/Close output neutral zone)

183 Dummy data

(Open/Close output differential gap)

184 Dummy data

(Action at feedback resistance

(FBR) input error)

185 Dummy data

(Feedback adjustment)


[Setting change rate limiter unit time]

187 Soak time unit

[Soak time unit selection]

GG

V2

VH

SY

FV

HU

RU

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC Data range


7 02CC 02CD 716 717 R/W The read data is “0.”


7 02CE 02CF 718 719 R/W The read data is “0.”


7 02D0 02D1 720 721 R/W The read data is “0.”






7 02D6 02D7 726 727 R/W 0.1 to 360.0 seconds

7 02D8 02D9 728 729 R/W In case of Input data type 0 or 2



2: 0 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds

to 9 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds






188 Input 1_Setting limiter high SH


Input 1_Setting limiter low to PV select input range high


Factory set value

0

0

0

0

0

0.1

3

3

Input 1_

Input range high

When Control with


No. Name

189 Input 1_Setting limiter low SL

Digits

Register address

HEX DEC


Data range


PV select input range low to Input 1_Setting limiter high




ST

SU

VR

[ROM version display]

193 Integrated operating time

[Integrated operating time display]

194 Peak hold monitor of ambient temperature

[Holding peak value ambient temperature display]

195 Dummy data

(Power feed transformer input value display)

196 Dummy data

(Feedback resistance (FBR) input assignment)

197 Dummy data

(Input 1_power feed forward gain)

UT

Hp

HM

VG

PZ

198 Dummy data

(Input 2_power feed forward gain)

PW

199 Dummy data

(Heater break alarm 1 (HBA1) type selection])

ND

7

7

7


02E0 02E1 736 737 R/W Input 2_Input range low to Input 2_Setting limiter high


02E2 02E3 738 739 RO Version of ROM built in the instrument

02E4 02E5 740 741 RO 0 to 65535 hours

02E7 742 743 RO 120 to  120  C

7 02E8 02E9 744 745 R/W The read data is “0.”


7 02EA 02EB 746 747 R/W The read data is “0.”


7 02EC 02ED 748 749 R/W The read data is “0.”


7 02EE 02EF 750 751 R/W The read data is “0.”


7 02F0 02F1 752 753 R/W The read data is “0.”


Factory set value

Input 1_

Input range low

When Control with

PV select: PV select input range low

Input 2_

Input range high

Input 2_

Input range low







0

0

0

0

0

No. Name

DH

Digits

7

Register address

HEX DEC


02F2 02F3 754 755 R/W 0 to 255 times 200 Number of heater break alarm 1

(HBA1) delay times

201 Dummy data

(Heater break alarm 2 (HBA2) type selection)


(HBA2) delay times


[Alarm lamp lighting condition setting 1]

204 Dummy data

(Alarm lamp lighting condition setting 2)

NG

DF

LY

LZ

7

7

02F4 02F5 756 757 R/W The read data is “0.”

02F6 02F7 758 759

Data range


R/W 0 to 255 times

7 02F8 02F9 760 761 R/W 0 to 4095

OFF

 1: Event 1

 2: Event 2

 4: Event 3

 8: Event 4










7 02FA 02FB 762 763 R/W The read data is “0.”


Factory set value

5

0

5

255

0

6.3.5 Memory area data equivalent to the HA series (Area designation method) [Modbus double word]

Register addresses 0500H to 0534H are used to check and change set values belonging to the Memory area.


Register address

No. Name

1

2



[Event 1 set value]


Event 1 set value (EV1) [high] bute

Data range


0500 0501 1280 1281 R/W 1 to 16


(Without area set signal)” and when “External mode” is selected with the Control area Local/External transfer, the data is RO

(Read only).

0502 0503 1282 1283 R/W Deviation



















 5.0 to  105.0 %

Factory set value

1

TC/RTD inputs:

10

V/I inputs:

5 % of input span

50.0

Register address

No. Name


[Event 2 set value] bute

Data range


0504 0505 1284 1285 R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1)/Event 1 set value (EV1) [high]




[Event 3 set value]



5 Input 1_Control loop break alarm (LBA) time

[Control loop break alarm 1 (LBA1) time]

0506

0508

0507

0509

1286

1288

1287

1289

R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1)/Event 1 set value (EV1) [high]


0: No function


[LBA2 deadband]




0512 0513 1298 1299 R/W Input 1_Setting limiter low to Input 1_Setting limiter high


Factory set value


[LBA1 deadband]






[Control loop break alarm 2 (LBA2) time]

050A 050B 1290 1291 R/W 0 to Input 1_Input span



050C 050D 1292 1293 R/W Same as Event 1 set value (EV1)/Event 1 set value (EV1) [high]

050E 050F 1294 1295 R/W 0 to 7200 seconds

0: No function


480


0


480


0

0

Register address

No. Name







[Input 1_derivative time]


[Input 1_control response parameter]

15 Unused bute

Data range







0 (0.0, 0.00): ON/OFF action



0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PD action




0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PI action


051A 051B 1306 1307 R/W 0: Slow 1: Medium 2: Fast


051C 051D 1308 1309  


[Input 2_set value (SV2)]








0 (0.0, 0.00): ON/OFF action

Factory set value

TC/RTD inputs:

30

V/I inputs:

3.0

240.00

60.00

PID control: 0

Heat/Cool PID control: 2



0

TC/RTD inputs:

30

V/I inputs:

3.0

Register address

No. Name



[Input 2_derivative time]


[Input 2_control response parameter]

21 Unused bute

Data range




0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PD action




0 (0.0, 0.00, 0.000): PI action


0526 0527 1318 1319 R/W 0: Slow 1: Medium 2: Fast


0528 0529 1320 1321  

[Input 1_setting change rate limiter (up)]


[Input 1_setting change rate limiter (down)]

[Input 2_setting change rate limiter (up)]

[Input 2_setting change rate limiter (down)]

052A 052B 1322 1323 R/W 0 to Input 1_Input span


0: No function




0: No function


052E 052F 1326 1327 R/W 0 to Input 2_Input span

0: No function



0: No function


Factory set value

240.00

60.00

0

0

0



0

0

Register address

No. Name

26 Area soak time bute

Data range


0532 0533 1330 1331 R/W In case of Input data type 0 or 2







 Modbus


0 to 5999 minutes

0 to 5999 seconds (10 ms) (Calculation is performed every 50 ms.)










0 to 5999 seconds (10 ms) (Calculation is performed every 50 ms.)


0534 0535 1332 1333 R/W 0 to 16

0: No function

Factory set value

RKC communication:

0:00

(0.00 seconds)

Modbus:

0

RKC communication:

0:00

(0.00 seconds)

Modbus:

0

0

6.4 Modbus (Single Word) Data

6.4.1 GZ400/GZ900 communication data [Modbus single word]

The following table shows single word register address of Modbus.

For attribute, data range, and factory set values, refer to 6.3.1 GZ400/GZ900 Communication data [RKC communication identifier/Modbus double word] (P. 6-12) .

When Input data type is set to “1,” the communication data will be Modbus single word.



No. Name


No. Name






2000

2001

2002

2003

8192

8193

8194

8195

5 PV select Measured value (PV)

6 Measured value (PV) of differential temperature input

7 Set value (SV) monitor of differential temperature input

8 Input output value monitor

[heat-side]

9 Input output value monitor

[cool-side]


2004

2009

11 Current transformer 1 (CT1) input value monitor 200A

8196

2005 8197

2006 8198

2007 8199

2008 8200

8201

8202

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12 Current transformer 2 (CT2) input value monitor 200B



200C

8203

8204

12

13

200D 8205 14

15 Event 1 state monitor 200E 8206 15

1

2

3

4






21 Control loop break alarm 1 (LBA1) state monitor

22 Control loop break alarm 2 (LBA2) state monitor

23 Comprehensive state



26 DI state monitor

27 OUT state monitor

28 DO state monitor





200F 8207

2010 8208

2011 8209

2012 8210

2013 8211

2014 8212

2015 8213

2016 8214

2017 8215

2018 8216

2019 8217

201A 8218

201B 8219

201C 8220

201D 8221

201E 8222

201F 8223

28

29

30

31

32

24

25

26

27

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

No. Name

Register address

33 Input 1_Bottom hold monitor 2020 8224

34 Input 2_Peak hold monitor 2021 8225

35 Input 2_Bottom hold monitor 2022 8226

36 Input 1_AT remaining time monitor 2023 8227

37 Input 2_AT remaining time monitor 2024 8228

38 Input 1_AT/ST status monitor 2025 8229

39 Input 2_AT/ST status monitor 2026 8230

40 Error 2027 8231

41 Integrated operating time 2028 8232

42 Peak hold monitor of ambient temperature 2029 8233

43 Retransmission output 1 decimal point position 202A

44 Retransmission output 2 decimal point position 202B

45 Retransmission output 3 decimal point position 202C

46 Event 1 decimal point position 202D

47


49

50 Interlock

51


53

54 Bottom suppression start signal

55

Event 2 decimal point position

Event 4 decimal point position


Input 2_Hold reset

RUN/STOP

202E

202F

2030

2031

2032

2033

2034

2035

8234

8235

8236

8237

8238

8239

8240

8241

8242

8243

8244

8245

2036 8246




2037

2038

8247

8248

2039 8249

6.3.1

37

38

39

40

33

34

35

36

41

42

58

59

60

61

54

55

56

57

50

51

52

53

46

47

48

49

No. Name


59 Input 2_Startup tuning (ST) 203A 8250 62

60 Input 1_Auto/Manual transfer 203B 8251 63

61 Input 2_Auto/Manual transfer 203C 8252 64

62 Remote/Local 203D 8253 65

63 Control area Local/External transfer 203E 8254 66

64 Input 1_Set value (SV) ★

203F 8255 67

65 Input 2_Set value (SV) ★ 2040 8256 68


★




2041 8257 69

2042 8258 70

★

★ 2043 8259 71

69

70

72







2044 8260 72

★

★ 2045 8261 73

2046 8262 74

★

★ 2047 8263 75


74



★

★

2048 8264

2049 8265

75 Input 1_Proportional band [heat-side] ★ 204A 8266

76 Input 1_Integral time [heat-side] ★

204B 8267

77 Input 1_Derivative time [heat-side] ★

204C 8268

78 Input 1_Control response parameter ★

204D 8269

79 Input 1_Proactive intensity ★ 204E 8270


76

77

78

79

80

81

82

No. Name

Register address

6.3.1

80

82

Input reset



83 Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side]

★

★

★

204F 8271

2050 8272

2051 8273

★ 2052 8274

83

84

86

85


★


2053 8275

★ 2054 8276

87

88

86

87

88

89

90

91

92

Input 2_Proportional band

Input

Input time

Input 2_Derivative time

Input 2_Control response parameter

Input 2_Proactive intensity reset

Input 2_FF amount

★

★

★

2055 8277

2056 8278

2057 8279

★ 2058 8280

★ 2059 8281

★ 205A 8282

★ 205B 8283



★

★

205C 8284

205D 8285

96

97


★


205E 8286

★ 205F 8287

98

99





★

★

★

★

2060 8288

2061 8289

2062 8290

2063 8291

100

101

102

103

101 Input 1_Output limiter high [cool-side]

Input 1_Output limiter low [heat-side] ★

2064 8292 104


93

94

95

89

90

91

92

No. Name

Register address

6.3.1

102 Input 1_Output limiter low [cool-side] ★ 2065 8293 105

103 Select Trigger type for Memory area transfer ★ 2066 8294 106

104 Area soak time

105 Link area number

★

★

2067 8295

2068 8296

107

108

106 Input 1_Setting change rate limiter (up) ★ 2069 8297 109

107 Input 1_Setting change rate limiter (down) ★ 206A 8298 110


★

206B 8299 111

109 Input 1_Manipulated output value (Area) ★ 206C 8300 112

110 Input 2_Setting change rate limiter (up) ★ 206D 8301 113

111 Input 2_Setting change rate limiter (down) ★ 206E 8302 114


★

206F 8303 115

113 Input 2_Manipulated output value (Area) ★ 2070 8304 116





★

★

★

★

2071 8305

2072 8306

2073 8307

2074 8308

117

118

119

120







★ 2075 8309 121

★ 2076 8310 122

★ 2077 8311 123

★ 2078 8312 124

★ 2079 8313 125

★ 207A 8314 126


No. Name


124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145



Input 2_Number of knee point

Input 2_Knee point input value 1










Display update cycle

Input 1_PV bias

Input 1_PV digital filter

Input 1_PV ratio

Input 1_PV low input cut-off

Input 2_PV bias (RS bias)

Input 2_PV digital filter (RS digital filter)

Input 2_PV ratio (RS ratio)

Input 2_PV low input cut-off

★

★

★

★

★

★

★

★

★

★

★

★

★

207B 8315 127

207C 8316 128

207D 8317 129

207E 8318 130

207F 8319 131

2080 8320 132

2081 8321 133

2082 8322 134

2083 8323 135

2084 8324 136

2085 8325 137

2086 8326 138

2087 8327 139

2088 8328 140

2089 8329 141

208A 8330 142

208B 8331 143

208C 8332 144

208D 8333 145

208E 8334 146

208F 8335 147

2090 8336 148


No. Name

Register address

146

147

OUT1 proportional cycle time







153 Number of heater break alarm 1 (HBA1) delay times



156 Input 1_Manual manipulated output value

157 Input 1_Level PID setting 1










167 Input 2_ Manual manipulated output value


6.3.1

2091 8337 149

2092 8338 150

2093 8339 151

2094 8340 152

2095 8341 153

2096 8342 154

2097

2098 8344 156

2099

8343

8345

155

157

209A 8346 158

209B 8347 159

209C 8348 160

209D 8349 161

209E 8350 162

209F 8351 163

20A0 8352 164

20A1 8353 165

20A2 8354 166

20A3 8355 167

20A4 8356 168

20A5 8357 169

20A6 8358 170

20A7 8359 171

No. Name

Register address

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

Input 2_Level PID setting 2






Input 2_ON/OFF action differential gap

Input 2_ON/OFF action differential gap (upper)

Input 2_ON/OFF action differential gap (lower)

Input 1_AT bias

Input 2_AT bias

FF amount learning



183 PV select transfer level

184 PV select transfer time

6.3.1

20A8 8360 172

20A9 8361 173

20AA 8362 174

20AB 8363 175

20AC 8364 176

20AD 8365 177

20AE 8366 178

20AF 8367 179

20B0 8368 180

20B1 8369 181

20B2 8370 182

20B3 8371 183

20B4 8372 184

20B5 8373 185

20B6 8374 186

20B7 8375 187

Items 185 to 380 are data in the Engineering mode.

Communication data the Engineering mode should be set according to the application before setting any parameter related to operation. Once the communication data in the Engineering mode are set correctly, no further changes need to be made to parameters for the same application under normal conditions. If they are changed unnecessarily, it may result in malfunction or failure of the instrument. RKC will not bear any responsibility for malfunction or failure as a result of improper changes in the

Engineering mode.

Parameters in Engineering mode are settable only when the controller is in STOP mode. However, only checking can be made even in the

RUN state.

No. Name


No. Name

Register address

6.3.1








192 Select hide items in Monitor mode

193 Select hide items in Operation transfer mode

194 Data registration

195 FUNC key assignment

196 FUNC key operation selection


20B8 8376 188

20B9 8377 189

20BA 8378 190

20BB 8379 191

20BC 8380 192

20BD 8381 193

20BE 8382 194

20BF 8383 195

20C0 8384 196

20C1 8385 197

20C2 8386 198

20C3 8387 199

20C4 8388 200

198 Input 1_Display unit






204 Input 1_Temperature compensation calculation


206 Input 1_Selection of knee point function




210 Input 1_Inverting input

20C5 8389 201

20C6 8390 202

20C7 8391 203

20C8 8392 204

20C9 8393 205

20CA 8394 206

20CB 8395 207

20CC 8396 208

20CD 8397 209

20CE 8398 210

20CF 8399 211

20D0 8400 212

20D1 8401 213

No. Name

Register address

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

Input data type

Power supply frequency

Input 2_Input type





Input 2_Input error determination point (high)

Input 2_Input error determination point (low)

Input 2_Temperature compensation calculation

Input 2_Burnout direction

Input 2_Selection of knee point function

Input 2_Selection of correction value setting

Input 2_Knee point correction limit value

Input 2_Square root extraction

Input 2_Inverting input

DI1 function selection






DI logic invert

Area switching time (Without area set signal)

6.3.1

20D2 8402 214

20D3 8403 215

20D4 8404 216

20D5 8405 217

20D6 8406 218

20D7 8407 219

20D8 8408 220

20D9 8409 221

20DA 8410 222

20DB 8411 223

20DC 8412 224

20DD 8413 225

20DE 8414 226

20DF 8415 227

20E0 8416 228

20E1 8417 229

20E2 8418 230

20E3 8419 231

20E4 8420 232

20E5 8421 233

20E6 8422 234

20E7 8423 235

20E8 8424 236

20E9 8425 237

No. Name

Register address

235

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

257

OUT1 function selection



OUT1 logic calculation selection



Energized/De-energized selection

Interlock selection

Output action at control stop

Universal output type selection (OUT3)

Retransmission output 1 type

Retransmission output 1 scale high

Retransmission output 1 scale low







DO1 function selection





6.3.1

20EA 8426 238

20EB 8427 239

20EC 8428 240

20ED 8429 241

20EE 8430 242

20EF 8431 243

20F0 8432 244

20F1 8433 245

20F2 8434 246

20F3 8435 247

20F4 8436 248

20F5 8437 249

20F6 8438 250

20F7 8439 251

20F8 8440 252

20F9 8441 253

20FA 8442 254

20FB 8443 255

20FC 8444 256

20FD 8445 257

20FE 8446 258

20FF 8447 259

2100 8448 260

2101 8449 261

No. Name

Register address

259

260

261

262

263

264

265

266

267

268

269

270

271

272

273

274

275

276

277

278

279

280

281

282

DO2 logic calculation selection



Event 1 assignment

Event 1 type

Event 1 hold action

Event 1 differential gap

Event 1 timer

Event 2 assignment

Event 2 type

Event 2 hold action


Event 2 timer

Event 3 assignment

Event 3 type

Event 3 hold action


Event 3 timer

Event 4 assignment

Event 4 type

Event 4 hold action


Event 4 timer

CT1 assignment

6.3.1

2102 8450 262

2103 8451 263

2104 8452 264

2105 8453 265

2106 8454 266

2107 8455 267

2108 8456 268

2109 8457 269

210A 8458 270

210B 8459 271

210C 8460 272

210D 8461 273

210E 8462 274

210F 8463 275

2110 8464 276

2111 8465 277

2112 8466 278

2113 8467 279

2114 8468 280

2115 8469 281

2116 8470 282

2117 8471 283

2118 8472 284

2119 8473 285

No. Name


283

284

285

286

287

288

289

290

291

292

293

294

295

CT1 type

CT1 ratio

CT1 low input cut-off

CT2 assignment

CT2 type

CT2 ratio

CT2 low input cut-off

Hot/Cold start

Manual manipulated output value selection

SV tracking

Integral/Derivative time decimal point position

ST start condition

Input 1_Control action

296 Input 1_Output change rate limiter (up)

[heat-side]

297 Input 1_Output change rate limiter (down)

[heat-side]


211A 8474 286

211B 8475 287

211C 8476 288

211D 8477 289

211E 8478 290

211F 8479 291

2120 8480 292

2121 8481 293

2122 8482 294

2123 8483 295

2124 8484 296

2125 8485 297

2126 8486 298

2127 8487 299

2128 8488 300


2129

212A

300 Input 1_Manipulated output value at input error 212B

8489

8490

8491

301

302

303


[heat-side]

302 Input 1_Start determination point

212C 8492 304

303

304

305 Input 2_Control action


Input 1_Level PID action selection

Input 1_Level PID differential gap

212D 8493 305

212E 8494 306

212F 8495 307

2130 8496 308

2131 8497 309

No. Name

Register address

307

308

309

310

311

312

313

314

Input 2_Output change rate limiter (down)

Input 2_Action (high) input error

Input 2_Action (low) input error

Input 2_Manipulated output value at input error

Input 2_ Manipulated output value at STOP

Input 2_Start determination point

Input 2_Level PID action selection

Input 2_Level PID differential gap


[cool-side]

316 Input 1_Output change rate limiter (down)

[cool-side]


[cool-side]



320 Bottom suppression function

321 Select function for input 2

322 Selection of PV select trigger

323 Input circuit error alarm set value

324 Communication protocol

325 Device address

326 Communication speed

327 Data bit configuration

328 Interval time

329 Register type

330 Register start number (High-order 4-bit)

6.3.1

2132 8498 310

2133 8499 311

2134 8500 312

2135 8501 313

2136 8502 314

2137 8503 315

2138 8504 316

2139 8505 317

213A 8506 318

213B 8507 319

213C 8508 320

213D 8509 321

213E 8510 322

213F 8511 323

2140 8512 324

2141 8513 325

2142 8514 326

2143 8515 327

2144 8516 328

2145 8517 329

2146 8518 330

2147 8519 331

2148 8520 332

2149 8521 333

No. Name

Register address

331

332

333

334

335

336

337

338

339

340

341

342

343

344

345

346

347

348

349

350

351

352

353

Setting item selection 4





Setting change rate limiter unit time

Soak time unit


Register start number (Low-order 16-bit)

Monitor item register bias

Setting item register bias

Instrument link recognition time

PLC response waiting time

PLC communication start time

Slave register bias

Number of recognizable devices

Station number

PC number

Monitor item selection 1






6.3.1

214A 8522 334

214B 8523 335

214C 8524 336

214D 8525 337

214E 8526 338

214F 8527 339

2150 8528 340

2151 8529 341

2152 8530 342

2153 8531 343

2154 8532 344

2155 8533 345

2156 8534 346

2157 8535 347

2158 8536 348

2159 8537 349

215A 8538 350

215B 8539 351

215C 8540 352

215D 8541 353

215E 8542 354

215F 8543 355

2160 8544 356

2161 8545 357

No. Name

Register address

355

356

357

358

359

360

361

362

363

364

365

366

367

368

369

370

371

372

373

374

375

376

377

378

Input 1_Setting limiter low nput 2_Setting limiter high


Initialization


Set lock level

Area lock

Select Blind function

Fix parameter setting

Parameter select direct registration

Parameter select setting 1














6.3.1

2162 8546 358

2163 8547 359

2164 8548 360

2165 8549 361

2166 8550 362

2167 8551 363

2168 8552 364

2169 8553 365

216A 8554 366

216B 8555 367

216C 8556 368

216D 8557 369

216E 8558 370

216F 8559 371

2170 8560 372

2171 8561 373

2172 8562 374

2173 8563 375

2174 8564 376

2175 8565 377

2176 8566 378

2177 8567 379

2178 8568 380

2179 8569 381

No. Name

Register address



6.3.1

217A 8570 382

217B 8571 383

6.4 Modbus (Single Word) Data [Memory Area]

6.4.2 Memory area data (Direct designation method)

[Modbus single word]

Register addresses 2500H to 298FH are used to check and change set values belonging to the Memory area.

For the details of attribute, data range and factory set values, refer to  Memory area 1 data (P.6-80), 6.3.2

Memory area data (Direct designation method) [Modbus double word] .

For the Memory area, refer to the 5.9 How to Use Memory Area Data (P. 5-18) .

6-152

IMR03D07-E1



No.

Name




4




6




8




10






























38





41 Area soak time

42 Link area number




46 Input 1_Manipulated output value (Area)



Register address

HEX DEC

2500

2501

2502

9472

9473

9474

2503

2504

2505

2506

2507

2508

2509

2515

2516

2517

2518

2519

251A

251B

251C

251D

251E

251F

2520

2521

250A

250B

250C

250D

250E

250F

2510

2511

2512

2513

2514

2522

2523

2524

2525

2526

2527

2528

2529

252A

252B

252C

252D

252E

9475

9476

9477

9478

9479

9480

9481

9510

9511

9512

9513

9514

9515

9516

9517

9518

9493

9494

9495

9496

9497

9498

9499

9500

9501

9502

9503

9504

9505

9482

9483

9484

9485

9486

9487

9488

9489

9490

9491

9492

9506

9507

9508

9509 256E

256F

2570

2571

2572

2573

2574

2575

2576

2577

2566

2567

2568

2569

256A

255E

255F

2560

2561

2562

2563

2564

2565

2553

2554

2555

2556

2557

2558

2559

255A

255B

255C

255D

256B

256C

256D


Register address

HEX DEC

2549

254A

254B

9545

9546

9547

254C 9548

254D

254E

254F

2550

2551

2552

9549

9550

9551

9552

9553

9554

9582

9583

9584

9585

9586

9587

9588

9589

9590

9591

9566

9567

9568

9569

9570

9571

9572

9573

9574

9575

9576

9577

9578

9555

9556

9557

9558

9559

9560

9561

9562

9563

9564

9565

9579

9580

9581

6.3.2

Reference

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

38

39

44

45

46

47

40

41

42

43

26

27

28

29

22

23

24

25

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

19

20

21

25B7

25B8

25B9

25BA

25BB

25BC

25BD

25BE

25BF

25C0

25A7

25A8

25A9

25AA

25AB

25AC

25AD

25AE

25AF

25B0

25B1

25B2

25B3

259C

259D

259E

259F

25A0

25A1

25A2

25A3

25A4

25A5

25A6

25B4

25B5

25B6


Register address

HEX DEC

2592

2593

2594

9618

9619

9620

2595 9621

2596

2597

2598

2599

259A

259B

9622

9623

9624

9625

9626

9627

9655

9656

9657

9658

9659

9660

9661

9662

9663

9664

9639

9640

9641

9642

9643

9644

9645

9646

9647

9648

9649

9650

9651

9628

9629

9630

9631

9632

9633

9634

9635

9636

9637

9638

9652

9653

9654

IMR03D07-E1

6-153



No.

Name



























253A

253B

253C

253D

253E

253F

2540

2541

2542

2543

2544

2545

2546

2547

2548


Register address

HEX DEC

252F

2530

2531

2532

2533

2534

2535

2536

2537

2538

2539

9519

9520

9521

9522

9523

9524

9525

9526

9527

9528

9529

9530

9531

9532

9533

9534

9535

9536

9537

9538

9539

9540

9541

9542

9543

9544

2583

2584

2585

2586

2587

2588

2589

258A

258B

258C

258D

258E

258F

2590

2591


Register address

HEX DEC

2578

2579

257A

257B

257C

257D

257E

257F

2580

2581

2582

9592

9593

9594

9595

9596

9597

9598

9599

9600

9601

9602

9603

9604

9605

9606

9607

9608

9609

9610

9611

9612

9613

9614

9615

9616

9617

25CC

25CD

25CE

25CF

25D0

25D1

25D2

25D3

25D4

25D5

25D6

25D7

25D8

25D9

25DA


Register address

HEX DEC

25C1

25C2

25C3

25C4

25C5

25C6

25C7

25C8

25C9

25CA

25CB

9665

9666

9667

9668

9669

9670

9671

9672

9673

9674

9675

9676

9677

9678

9679

9680

9681

9682

9683

9684

9685

9686

9687

9688

9689

9690

6.3.2

Reference

No.

63

64

65

66

59

60

61

62

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

52

53

54

55

48

49

50

51

56

57

58

6-154

IMR03D07-E1



No.

Name

Memory area 4 data Memory area 5 data Memory area 6 data

Register address Register address Register address

HEX DEC HEX DEC HEX DEC



25DB

25DC

3 Set value (SV) of differential temperature input 25DD

4



25DE


6




25DF

25E0

25E1

8




10






























38





41 Area soak time

42 Link area number





25E2

25E3

25E4

2600

2601

2602

2603

2604

2605

2606

2607

2608

25F1

25F2

25F3

25F4

25F5

25F6

25F7

25F8

25F9

25FA

25FB

25FC

25E5

25E6

25E7

25E8

25E9

25EA

25EB

25EC

25ED

25EE

25EF

25F0

25FD

25FE

25FF

9691

9692

9693

9694

9695

9696

9697

9698

9699

9700

9701

9702

9703

9704

9705

9706

9707

9708

9709

9710

9711

9712

9713

9714

9715

9716

9717

9718

9719

9720

9721

9722

9723

9724

9725

9726

9727

9728

9729

9730

9731

9732

9733

9734

9735

9736

2624

2625

2626

2627

2628

2629

262A

262B

262C

262D

262E

262F

2630

2631

2632

2633

2634

2635

2636

2637

2638

2639

2649

264A

264B

264C

264D

264E

264F

2650

2651

263A

263B

263C

263D

263E

263F

2640

2641

2642

2643

2644

2645

2646

2647

2648

6.3.2

Reference

No.

9764

9765

9766

9767

9768

9769

9770

9771

9772

9773

9801

9802

9803

9804

9805

9806

9807

9808

9809

9786

9787

9788

9789

9790

9791

9792

9793

9794

9795

9796

9797

9774

9775

9776

9777

9778

9779

9780

9781

9782

9783

9784

9785

9798

9799

9800

266D

266E

266F

2670

2671

2672

2673

2674

2675

2676

2692

2693

2694

2695

2696

2697

2698

2699

269A

2683

2684

2685

2686

2687

2688

2689

268A

268B

268C

268D

268E

2677

2678

2679

267A

267B

267C

267D

267E

267F

2680

2681

2682

268F

2690

2691

9837

9838

9839

9840

9841

9842

9843

9844

9845

9846

9874

9875

9876

9877

9878

9879

9880

9881

9882

9859

9860

9861

9862

9863

9864

9865

9866

9867

9868

9869

9870

9847

9848

9849

9850

9851

9852

9853

9854

9855

9856

9857

9858

9871

9872

9873

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

8

9

10

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

27

28

29

30

23

24

25

26

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

19

20

21

22

IMR03D07-E1

6-155



No.

Name































2614

2615

2616

2617

2618

2619

261A

261B

261C

261D

261E

261F

2620

2609

260A

260B

260C

260D

260E

260F

2610

2611

2612

2613

2621

2622

2623

9748

9749

9750

9751

9752

9753

9754

9755

9756

9757

9758

9759

9760

9737

9738

9739

9740

9741

9742

9743

9744

9745

9746

9747

9761

9762

9763

265D

265E

265F

2660

2661

2662

2663

2664

2665

2666

2667

2668

2669

2652

2653

2654

2655

2656

2657

2658

2659

265A

265B

265C

266A

266B

266C

9821

9822

9823

9824

9825

9826

9827

9828

9829

9830

9831

9832

9833

9810

9811

9812

9813

9814

9815

9816

9817

9818

9819

9820

9834

9835

9836

26A6

26A7

26A8

26A9

26AA

26AB

26AC

26AD

26AE

26AF

26B0

26B1

26B2

269B

269C

269D

269E

269F

26A0

26A1

26A2

26A3

26A4

26A5

26B3

26B4

26B5

9894

9895

9896

9897

9898

9899

9900

9901

9902

9903

9904

9905

9906

9883

9884

9885

9886

9887

9888

9889

9890

9891

9892

9893

9907

9908

9909

6.3.2

Reference

No.

62

63

64

65

58

59

60

61

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

51

52

53

54

47

48

49

50

55

56

57

6-156

IMR03D07-E1



No.

Name




4




6




8




10






























38





41 Area soak time

42 Link area number








6.3.2

Reference

No.

26B6

26B7

26B8

26B9

26BA

26BB

26BC

26BD

26BE

26BF

26DB

26DC

26DD

26DE

26DF

26E0

26E1

26E2

26E3

26CB

26CC

26CD

26CE

26CF

26D0

26D1

26D2

26D3

26D4

26D5

26D6

26D7

26C0

26C1

26C2

26C3

26C4

26C5

26C6

26C7

26C8

26C9

26CA

26D8

26D9

26DA

9910

9911

9912

9913

9914

9915

9916

9917

9918

9919

9947

9948

9949

9950

9951

9952

9953

9954

9955

9931

9932

9933

9934

9935

9936

9937

9938

9939

9940

9941

9942

9943

9920

9921

9922

9923

9924

9925

9926

9927

9928

9929

9930

9944

9945

9946

26FF

2700

2701

2702

2703

2704

2705

2706

2707

2708

2724

2725

2726

2727

2728

2729

272A

272B

272C

2714

2715

2716

2717

2718

2719

271A

271B

271C

271D

271E

271F

2720

2709

270A

270B

270C

270D

270E

270F

2710

2711

2712

2713

2721

2722

2723

9983

9984

9985

9986

9987

9988

9989

9990

9991

9992

10020

10021

10022

10023

10024

10025

10026

10027

10028

10004

10005

10006

10007

10008

10009

10010

10011

10012

10013

10014

10015

10016

9993

9994

9995

9996

9997

9998

9999

10000

10001

10002

10003

10017

10018

10019

2748

2749

274A

274B

274C

274D

274E

274F

2750

2751

276D

276E

276F

2770

2771

2772

2773

2774

2775

275D

275E

275F

2760

2761

2762

2763

2764

2765

2766

2767

2768

2769

2752

2753

2754

2755

2756

2757

2758

2759

275A

275B

275C

276A

276B

276C

10056

10057

10058

10059

10060

10061

10062

10063

10064

10065

10093

10094

10095

10096

10097

10098

10099

10100

10101

10077

10078

10079

10080

10081

10082

10083

10084

10085

10086

10087

10088

10089

10066

10067

10068

10069

10070

10071

10072

10073

10074

10075

10076

10090

10091

10092

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

8

9

10

38

39

44

45

46

40

41

42

43

26

27

28

29

22

23

24

25

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

19

20

21

IMR03D07-E1

6-157



No.

Name































26EF

26F0

26F1

26F2

26F3

26F4

26F5

26F6

26F7

26F8

26F9

26FA

26E4

26E5

26E6

26E7

26E8

26E9

26EA

26EB

26EC

26ED

26EE

26FB

26FC

26FD

26FE

9967

9968

9969

9970

9971

9972

9973

9974

9975

9976

9977

9978

9956

9957

9958

9959

9960

9961

9962

9963

9964

9965

9966

9979

9980

9981

9982

2738

2739

273A

273B

273C

273D

273E

273F

2740

2741

2742

2743

272D

272E

272F

2730

2731

2732

2733

2734

2735

2736

2737

2744

2745

2746

2747

10040

10041

10042

10043

10044

10045

10046

10047

10048

10049

10050

10051

10029

10030

10031

10032

10033

10034

10035

10036

10037

10038

10039

10052

10053

10054

10055

2781

2782

2783

2784

2785

2786

2787

2788

2789

278A

278B

278C

2776

2777

2778

2779

277A

277B

277C

277D

277E

277F

2780

278D

278E

278F

2790

10113

10114

10115

10116

10117

10118

10119

10120

10121

10122

10123

10124

10102

10103

10104

10105

10106

10107

10108

10109

10110

10111

10112

10125

10126

10127

10128

6.3.2

Reference

No.

62

63

64

65

58

59

60

61

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

51

52

53

54

47

48

49

50

55

56

57

6-158

IMR03D07-E1



No.

Name




4




6




8




10






























38





41 Area soak time

42 Link area number





10129

10130

10131

10132

10133

10134

10135

10136

10137

10138

10166

10167

10168

10169

10170

10171

10172

10173

10174

10150

10151

10152

10153

10154

10155

10156

10157

10158

10159

10160

10161

10162

10139

10140

10141

10142

10143

10144

10145

10146

10147

10148

10149

10163

10164

10165

27DA

27DB

27DC

27DD

27DE

27DF

27E0

27E1

27E2

27E3

27FF

2800

2801

2802

2803

2804

2805

2806

2807

27EF

27F0

27F1

27F2

27F3

27F4

27F5

27F6

27F7

27F8

27F9

27FA

27FB

27E4

27E5

27E6

27E7

27E8

27E9

27EA

27EB

27EC

27ED

27EE

27FC

27FD

27FE




6.3.2

Reference

No.

2791

2792

2793

2794

2795

2796

2797

2798

2799

279A

27B6

27B7

27B8

27B9

27BA

27BB

27BC

27BD

27BE

27A6

27A7

27A8

27A9

27AA

27AB

27AC

27AD

27AE

27AF

27B0

27B1

27B2

279B

279C

279D

279E

279F

27A0

27A1

27A2

27A3

27A4

27A5

27B3

27B4

27B5

10202

10203

10204

10205

10206

10207

10208

10209

10210

10211

10239

10240

10241

10242

10243

10244

10245

10246

10247

10223

10224

10225

10226

10227

10228

10229

10230

10231

10232

10233

10234

10235

10212

10213

10214

10215

10216

10217

10218

10219

10220

10221

10222

10236

10237

10238

2823

2824

2825

2826

2827

2828

2829

282A

282B

282C

2848

2849

284A

284B

284C

284D

284E

284F

2850

2838

2839

283A

283B

283C

283D

283E

283F

2840

2841

2842

2843

2844

282D

282E

282F

2830

2831

2832

2833

2834

2835

2836

2837

2845

2846

2847

10275

10276

10277

10278

10279

10280

10281

10282

10283

10284

10312

10313

10314

10315

10316

10317

10318

10319

10320

10296

10297

10298

10299

10300

10301

10302

10303

10304

10305

10306

10307

10308

10285

10286

10287

10288

10289

10290

10291

10292

10293

10294

10295

10309

10310

10311

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

8

9

10

38

39

44

45

46

40

41

42

43

26

27

28

29

22

23

24

25

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

19

20

21

IMR03D07-E1

6-159



No.

Name































6.3.2

Reference

No.

27CA

27CB

27CC

27CD

27CE

27CF

27D0

27D1

27D2

27D3

27D4

27D5

27BF

27C0

27C1

27C2

27C3

27C4

27C5

27C6

27C7

27C8

27C9

27D6

27D7

27D8

27D9

10186

10187

10188

10189

10190

10191

10192

10193

10194

10195

10196

10197

10175

10176

10177

10178

10179

10180

10181

10182

10183

10184

10185

10198

10199

10200

10201

2813

2814

2815

2816

2817

2818

2819

281A

281B

281C

281D

281E

2808

2809

280A

280B

280C

280D

280E

280F

2810

2811

2812

281F

2820

2821

2822

10259

10260

10261

10262

10263

10264

10265

10266

10267

10268

10269

10270

10248

10249

10250

10251

10252

10253

10254

10255

10256

10257

10258

10271

10272

10273

10274

285C

285D

285E

285F

2860

2861

2862

2863

2864

2865

2866

2867

2851

2852

2853

2854

2855

2856

2857

2858

2859

285A

285B

2868

2869

286A

286B

10332

10333

10334

10335

10336

10337

10338

10339

10340

10341

10342

10343

10321

10322

10323

10324

10325

10326

10327

10328

10329

10330

10331

10344

10345

10346

10347

62

63

64

65

58

59

60

61

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

51

52

53

54

47

48

49

50

55

56

57

6-160

IMR03D07-E1



No.

Name




4




6




8




10






























38





41 Area soak time

42 Link area number





10348

10349

10350

10351

10352

10353

10354

10355

10356

10357

10385

10386

10387

10388

10389

10390

10391

10392

10393

10369

10370

10371

10372

10373

10374

10375

10376

10377

10378

10379

10380

10381

10358

10359

10360

10361

10362

10363

10364

10365

10366

10367

10368

10382

10383

10384

28B5

28B6

28B7

28B8

28B9

28BA

28BB

28BC

28BD

28BE

28DA

28DB

28DC

28DD

28DE

28DF

28E0

28E1

28E2

28CA

28CB

28CC

28CD

28CE

28CF

28D0

28D1

28D2

28D3

28D4

28D5

28D6

28BF

28C0

28C1

28C2

28C3

28C4

28C5

28C6

28C7

28C8

28C9

28D7

28D8

28D9




6.3.2

Reference

No.

286C

286D

286E

286F

2870

2871

2872

2873

2874

2875

2891

2892

2893

2894

2895

2896

2897

2898

2899

2881

2882

2883

2884

2885

2886

2887

2888

2889

288A

288B

288C

288D

2876

2877

2878

2879

287A

287B

287C

287D

287E

287F

2880

288E

288F

2890

10421

10422

10423

10424

10425

10426

10427

10428

10429

10430

10458

10459

10460

10461

10462

10463

10464

10465

10466

10442

10443

10444

10445

10446

10447

10448

10449

10450

10451

10452

10453

10454

10431

10432

10433

10434

10435

10436

10437

10438

10439

10440

10441

10455

10456

10457

28FE

28FF

2900

2901

2902

2903

2904

2905

2906

2907

2923

2924

2925

2926

2927

2928

2929

292A

292B

2913

2914

2915

2916

2917

2918

2919

291A

291B

291C

291D

291E

291F

2908

2909

290A

290B

290C

290D

290E

290F

2910

2911

2912

2920

2921

2922

10494

10495

10496

10497

10498

10499

10500

10501

10502

10503

10531

10532

10533

10534

10535

10536

10537

10538

10539

10515

10516

10517

10518

10519

10520

10521

10522

10523

10524

10525

10526

10527

10504

10505

10506

10507

10508

10509

10510

10511

10512

10513

10514

10528

10529

10530

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

8

9

10

38

39

44

45

46

40

41

42

43

26

27

28

29

22

23

24

25

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

19

20

21

IMR03D07-E1

6-161



No.

Name































6.3.2

Reference

No.

28A5

28A6

28A7

28A8

28A9

28AA

28AB

28AC

28AD

28AE

28AF

28B0

289A

289B

289C

289D

289E

289F

28A0

28A1

28A2

28A3

28A4

28B1

28B2

28B3

28B4

10405

10406

10407

10408

10409

10410

10411

10412

10413

10414

10415

10416

10394

10395

10396

10397

10398

10399

10400

10401

10402

10403

10404

10417

10418

10419

10420

28EE

28EF

28F0

28F1

28F2

28F3

28F4

28F5

28F6

28F7

28F8

28F9

28E3

28E4

28E5

28E6

28E7

28E8

28E9

28EA

28EB

28EC

28ED

28FA

28FB

28FC

28FD

10478

10479

10480

10481

10482

10483

10484

10485

10486

10487

10488

10489

10467

10468

10469

10470

10471

10472

10473

10474

10475

10476

10477

10490

10491

10492

10493

2937

2938

2939

293A

293B

293C

293D

293E

293F

2940

2941

2942

292C

292D

292E

292F

2930

2931

2932

2933

2934

2935

2936

2943

2944

2945

2946

10551

10552

10553

10554

10555

10556

10557

10558

10559

10560

10561

10562

10540

10541

10542

10543

10544

10545

10546

10547

10548

10549

10550

10563

10564

10565

10566

62

63

64

65

58

59

60

61

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

51

52

53

54

47

48

49

50

55

56

57

6-162

IMR03D07-E1


Memory area 16 data

No.

Name




4




6




8




10






























38





41 Area soak time

42 Link area number






Register address

HEX DEC

2947

2948

2949

294A

294B

294C

294D

294E

294F

2950

296C

296D

296E

296F

2970

2971

2972

2973

2974

295C

295D

295E

295F

2960

2961

2962

2963

2964

2965

2966

2967

2968

2951

2952

2953

2954

2955

2956

2957

2958

2959

295A

295B

2969

296A

296B

10567

10568

10569

10570

10571

10572

10573

10574

10575

10576

10604

10605

10606

10607

10608

10609

10610

10611

10612

10588

10589

10590

10591

10592

10593

10594

10595

10596

10597

10598

10599

10600

10577

10578

10579

10580

10581

10582

10583

10584

10585

10586

10587

10601

10602

10603

6.3.2項

参照No.

5

6

7

1

2

3

4

8

9

10

38

39

44

45

46

40

41

42

43

26

27

28

29

22

23

24

25

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

19

20

21

IMR03D07-E1

6-163


Memory area 16 data

No.

Name





























Register address

HEX DEC

2980

2981

2982

2983

2984

2985

2986

2987

2988

2989

298A

298B

2975

2976

2977

2978

2979

297A

297B

297C

297D

297E

297F

298C

298D

298E

298F

10624

10625

10626

10627

10628

10629

10630

10631

10632

10633

10634

10635

10613

10614

10615

10616

10617

10618

10619

10620

10621

10622

10623

10636

10637

10638

10639

6.3.2項

参照No.

62

63

64

65

58

59

60

61

66

67

68

69

70

71

72

73

51

52

53

54

47

48

49

50

55

56

57

6-164

IMR03D07-E1

6.4.3 Data mapping address [Modbus single word]

Necessary data can be read/written at one time by assigning any desired data (max. 32) continuously.

For GZ400/900 data: max. 32 (Register address setting 1 to 32)

For our FB series equivalent data: max. 16 (Register address setting 1 to 16)




Register address for data designation

No. Name

Register address Attri-

HEX DEC bute

1

2



[Read/write

[Read/write

1500H] 1000 4096 R/W

1501H] 1001 4097 R/W

Data range

3 Register address setting 3 [Read/write 1502H] 1002 4098 R/W

4 Register address setting 4 [Read/write

5

6



[Read/write address:1504H]

[Read/write

1004 4100 R/W Decimal number:

 1 to 20479

1505H] 1005 4101 R/W




FFFFH to 4FFFH



The register addresses for data designation (1000H to 101FH)


11 Register address setting 11 [Read/write address: 150AH] 100A 4106 R/W mapping), even if set.

12 Register address setting 12 [Read/write address: 150BH] 100B 4107 R/W

13 Register address setting 13 [Read/write address: 150CH]

14 Register address setting 14 [Read/write address: 150DH]

15 Register address setting 15 [Read/write address: 150EH]

16 Register address setting 16 [Read/write address: 150FH]

100C

100D

100E

100F

4108

4109

4110

4111

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Factory set value

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

No. Name


HEX DEC bute

17 Register address setting 17


[Read/write

[Read/write

1510H] 1010 4112 R/W

1511H] 1011 4113 R/W

Data range



Set the register address of data to be assigned to 1500H to 151FH

1513H] 1013 4115 R/W



[Read/write

[Read/write

1514H] 1014 4116 R/W

1515H] 1015 4117 R/W

 1 to 20479




FFFFH to 4FFFH



The register addresses for data designation (1000H to 101FH)


27 Register address setting 27 [Read/write address: 151AH] 101A 4122 R/W mapping), even if set.

28 Register address setting 28 [Read/write address: 151BH]

29 Register address setting 29 [Read/write address: 151CH]

30 Register address setting 30 [Read/write address: 151DH]

31 Register address setting 31 [Read/write address: 151EH]

32 Register address setting 32 [Read/write address: 151FH]

101B

101C

101D

101E

101F

4123

4124

4125

4126

4127

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

Factory set value

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1

 1



Register address for data read/write

No. Name


HEX DEC bute

1 Data specified Register address setting 1 (1000H) 1500 5376

2 Data specified Register address setting 2 (1001H)









11 Data specified Register address setting 11 (100AH)

12 Data specified Register address setting 12 (100BH)

13 Data specified Register address setting 13 (100CH)

14 Data specified Register address setting 14 (100DH)

15 Data specified Register address setting 15 (100EH)

16 Data specified Register address setting 16 (100FH)







5385

5386

5387

5388

5389

5390

5391

5392

5393

5394

5395

5396

5397

5377

5378

5379

5380

5381

5382

5383

5384

1509

150A

150B

150C

150D

150E

150F

1510

1511

1512

1513

1514

1515

1501

1502

1503

1504

1505

1506

1507

1508

Data range


Factory set value

No. Name


HEX DEC bute





27 Data specified Register address setting 27 (101AH)

28 Data specified Register address setting 28 (101BH)

29 Data specified Register address setting 29 (101CH)

30 Data specified Register address setting 30 (101DH)

1518

1519

151A

151B

151C

151D

151E

151F

5400

5401

5402

5403

5404

5405

5406

5407

Data range


31 Data specified Register address setting 31 (101EH)

32 Data specified Register address setting 32 (101FH)

Factory set value

6.4.4 FB series equivalent communication data [Modbus single word]

These are register addresses for our FB series equivalent data.

For attribute, data range, and factory set values, refer to 6.3.1 GZ400/GZ900 communication data [RKC communication identifier/Modbus double word]

(P. 6-12) .

The “FB series equivalent communication data” means the data of our FB series controllers compatible with the data of GZ400/900.

When Input data type is set to “1,” the communication data will be Modbus single word (including data equivalent to our FB series).



No.


1 Measured value (PV)

Name



Register address

HEX DEC

6.3.1

Reference No.

0000 0 1



4 Set value (SV) monitor

5 Remote setting (RS) input value monitor

6 Burnout state monitor

7 Unused

(Burnout state monitor of feedback resistance input)







14 Manipulated output value (MV1) monitor [heat-side]

15 Manipulated output value (MV2) monitor [cool-side]




Remote setting input value monitor

Input 1_Burnout state monitor

Unused (No applicable models)





Heater break alarm 1 (HBA1) state monitor

Heater break alarm 2 (HBA2) state monitor

Input 1_Manipulated output value monitor [cool-side]

0007

0008

0009

000A

000B

000C

0001

0002

0003

0004

0005

0006

000E

7

8

9

10

11

12

3

4

5

1

2

6

14

16

17

18

19

20

21

11

12

2

14

25



9

No.


16 Error code

17 Unused (Digital input (DI) state monitor)

18 Unused (Output state monitor)

19 Unused (Operation mode state monitor)


21 Integrated operating time monitor

22 Holding peak value ambient temperature monitor

23 Unused (Power feed forward input value monitor)

24 Unused (Backup memory state monitor)

25 Unused

26 Unused

27 Unused

28 Unused

29 Unused

30 Unused

31 Unused

32 Unused

33 PID/AT transfer

34 Auto/Manual transfer

35 Remote/Local transfer

Name


Error code




Memory area soak time monitor

Integrated operating time

Peak hold monitor of ambient temperature



Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Input 1_Autotuning (AT)

Input 1_Auto/Manual transfer

When Select function for input 2 is: “Remote setting input”

Remote/Local transfer


Input transfer of Control with PV select


2-loop control/Differential temperature control

RUN/STOP transfer


36 RUN/STOP transfer


Register address

HEX DEC

6.3.1

Reference No.

000F

0010

15

16

40



0011 17 

0012 18 

0013

0014

0015

0016

19

20

21

22

0017

0018

0019

001A

23

24

25

26







13

41

42





001B

001C

001D

001E

27

28

29

30

001F 31 

0020

0021

32

33

59

63

0022 34 65









0023

0024

35

36

58

54

No.


38 Interlock release





43 Control loop break alarm (LBA) time

45 Set value (SV)

46 Proportional band [heat-side]

47 Integral time [heat-side]

48 Derivative time [heat-side]

49 Control response parameter

50 Proportional band [cool-side]

51 Integral time [cool-side]

52 Derivative time [cool-side]

53 Overlap/Deadband

55 Setting change rate limiter (up)

56 Setting change rate limiter (down)

Name


Register address

HEX DEC

6.3.1

Reference No.

0025 37 53 Interlock release

★

★

Event 1 set value (EV1) ★






0026 38 70

0027 39 72

★

★







★ Input 1_Control loop break alarm (LBA) time

0028 40 74

0029 41 76

★ 002A 42 87

★ Input 1_LBA deadband (LBD) ★ 002B 43 88

★

★

★ Input 1_Integral time [heat-side]

★ Input 1_Derivative time [heat-side]

★ Input 1_Control response parameter

★ Input 1_Proportional band [cool-side]

★ Input 1_Integral time [cool-side]

★ Input 1_Derivative time [cool-side]

★ Input 1_Overlap/Deadband

★ Input 1_Manual reset

★

★




Input 1_Setting change rate limiter (down)


★ 002C

★ 002D

★ 002E

★ 002F

★ 0030

★ 0031

★ 0032

★ 0033

★ 0034

★ 0035

★ 0036

★ 0037

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

101

102

103

83

109

110

67

78

79

80

81

100

No.


57 Area soak time


60 Unused (Heater break determination point 1)

61 Unused (Heater melting determination point 1)


63 Unused (Heater break determination point 2)

Name

★ Area soak time

★ Link area number


Heater break alarm 1 (HBA1) set value



Number of heater break alarm 2 (HBA2) delay times


64 Unused (Heater melting determination point 2)

65 PV bias

66 PV digital filter

67 PV ratio


Input 1_PV bias


Input 1_PV ratio

68 PV low input cut-off Input 1_PV low input cut-off

Cascade control:

Cascade bias

Ratio setting:

Ratio setting bias

70 RS digital filter

Cascade control:

Cascade digital filter

Ratio setting:

Ratio setting digital filter



RS bias

Input 2_PV bias

No applicable models

Cascade bias

Ratio setting bias


RS digital filter



Cascade digital filter

Ratio setting digital filter

Register address

HEX DEC

6.3.1

Reference No.

★ 0038 56 107

★ 0039

003A

003B

003C

57

58

59

60

108

155





003D

003E

61

62

003F

0040

0041

0042

63

64

65

66

157





141

142

143

0043 67 144

0044 68 145

0045 69 146

No.


Cascade control:

Cascade ratio

Ratio setting:

Ratio setting ratio

72 Proportional cycle time [heat-side]

73 Proportional cycle time [cool-side]

74 Manual manipulated output value

75 Set lock level

76 STOP display

77 Unused (Bar graph display)

78 Unused (Bar graph display resolution)

79 Unused (Direct key 1)



82 Unused (Direct key type)

83 Input type

84 Display unit

85 Decimal point position

86 Input scale high

87 Input scale low

88 Input error determination point (high)

89 Input error determination point (low)

90 Burnout direction

Name



RS ratio

Input 2_PV ratio


Cascade ratio

Ratio setting ratio



Input 1_Manual manipulated output value

Set lock level

STOP display selection







Input 1_Input type





Input 1_Input error determination point (high)

Input 1_Input error determination point (low)

Input 1_Burnout direction

Register address

HEX DEC

6.3.1

Reference No.

0046 70 147

83

84

85

86

79

80

81

82

87

88

89

75

76

77

78

71

72

73

74

004F

0050

0051

0052

0053

0054

0055

0056

0047

0048

0049

004A

004B

004C

004D

004E

0057

0058

0059

201

202

203

204

205

206

208

149

150

159

363







188







200

No.


91 Square root extraction


93 Unused (Sampling cycle)

94 Unused (Remote setting input type)

95 Unused (Digital input (DI) assignment)

96 Unused (Output assignment)

97 Unused (Timer 1)

98 Unused (Timer 2)

99 Unused (Timer 3)

100 Unused (Timer 4)

101 Energized/De-energized

102 Alarm (ALM) lamp lighting condition 1

103 Unused (Alarm (ALM) lamp lighting condition 2)

104 Output status at STOP mode

105 Unused

106 Unused

107 Unused

108 Unused

109 Unused

110 Unused

111 Transmission output type

112 Transmission output scale high

113 Transmission output scale low

114 Event 1 type

Name


Input 1_Square root extraction

Power supply frequency









Energized/De-energized selection

ALM lamp lighting condition


Output action at control stop

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused

Unused




Event 1 type

Register address

HEX DEC

6.3.1

Reference No.

005A 90 212

005B

005C

005D

005E

005F

0060

0061

0062

0063

0064

91

92

93

94

95

96

97

98

99

100

215

















244

0065

0066

0067

0068

101

102

103

104

0069

006A

006B

006C

006D

006E

006F

0070

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

189



246













248

249

250

0071 113 266

No.



116 Unused (Event 1 interlock)



119 Unused (Force ON of Event 1 action)

120 Event 2 type




124 Event 2 delay timer


126 Event 3 type






132 Event 4 type






Name


Event 1 hold action



Event 1 timer


Event 2 type

Event 2 hold action



Event 2 timer


Event 3 type

Event 3 hold action



Event 3 timer


Event 4 type

Event 4 hold action



Event 4 timer


0081

0082

0083

0084

0085

0086

0087

0088

Register address

HEX DEC

6.3.1

Reference No.

0072 114 267

0073

0074

115

116



268

0075

0076

0077

0078

117

118

119

120

0079

007A

007B

007C

007D

007E

007F

0080

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

274



276

277



278

269



271

272



273

129

130

131

132

133

134

135

136

279



281

282



283

284



No.


142 CT2 ratio


138 CT1 ratio

139 CT1 assignment

140 Unused (Heater break alarm 1 (HBA1) type)

144 Unused (Heater break alarm 2 (HBA2) type)


146 Hot/Cold start

147 Start determination point

148 External input type

149 Unused (Master channel selection)

150 SV tracking

151 MV transfer function

[Action taken when changed to Manual mode from Auto mode]

152 Control action

153 Integral/derivative time decimal point position

154 Unused (Derivative action)


156 Unused (Derivative gain)

157 ON/OFF action differential gap (upper)

158 ON/OFF action differential gap (lower)

159 Action (high) at input error

160 Action (low) at input error

Name


CT1 ratio

CT1 assignment



CT2 ratio

CT2 assignment



Hot/Cold start

Input 1_Start determination point



SV tracking

Manual manipulated output value selection

Input 1_Control action

Integral/Derivative time decimal point position


Undershoot suppression factor


Input 1_ON/OFF action differential gap (upper)

Input 1_ON/OFF action differential gap (lower)

Input 1_Action (high) input error

Input 1_Action (low) input error

0097

0098

0099

009A

009B

009C

009D

009E

009F

Register address

HEX DEC

6.3.1

Reference No.

0089 137 287

008A

008B

138

139

285



008C

008D

008E

008F

140

141

142

143

156

291

289



0090

0091

0092

0093

0094

0095

0096

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

158

293

305

324



295

294

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

298

296



321



168

179

301

302

No.


161 Manipulated output value at input error

162 Manipulated output value (MV1) at STOP mode

163 Manipulated output value (MV2) at STOP mode

164 Output change rate limiter (up) [MV1]

165 Output change rate limiter (down) [MV1]

166 Output limiter high (MV1)

167 Output limiter low (MV1)

168 Output change rate limiter (up) [MV2]

169 Output change rate limiter (down) [MV2]

170 Output limiter high (MV2)

171 Output limiter low (MV2)

172 Unused (Power feed forward selection)

173 Unused (Power feed forward gain)

174 AT bias

175 Unused (AT cycles

176 Unused (Output value with AT turned on)

177 Unused (Output value with AT turned off)

178 Unused (AT differential gap time)

179 Unused (Proportional band adjusting factor [heat-side])

180 Unused (Integral time adjusting factor [heat-side])

181 Unused (Derivative time adjusting factor [heat-side])

182 Unused (Proportional band adjusting factor [cool-side])

183 Unused (Integral time adjusting factor [cool-side])


Name


Input 1_Manipulated output value at input error

Input 1_ Manipulated output value at STOP [heat-side]

Input 1_ Manipulated output value at STOP [cool-side]

Input 1_Output change rate limiter (up) [heat-side]

Input 1_Output change rate limiter (up) [heat-side]



Input 1_Output change rate limiter (up) [cool-side]

Input 1_Output change rate limiter (down) [cool-side]





Input 1_AT bias










Register address

HEX DEC

6.3.1

Reference No.

00A0 160 303

00A1

00A2

161

162

304

320

00A3

00A4

★ 00A5

★ 00A6

163

164

165

166

299

300

85

86

★

★

00A7

00A8

00A9

00AA

00AB

00AC

00AD

00AE

00AF

00B0

00B1

00B2

00B3

00B4

00B5

00B6

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

318

319

104

105















181









No.


184 Unused (Derivative time adjusting factor [cool-side])

185 Unused (Proportional band limiter (high) [heat-side])

186 Unused (Proportional band limiter (low) [heat-side])

187 Unused (Integral time limiter (high) [heat-side])

188 Unused (Integral time limiter (low) [heat-side])

189 Unused (Derivative time limiter (high) [heat-side])

190 Unused (Derivative time limiter (low) [heat-side])

191 Unused (Proportional band limiter (high) [cool-side])

192 Unused (Proportional band limiter (low) [cool-side])

193 Unused (Integral time limiter (high) [cool-side])

194 Unused (Integral time limiter (low) [cool-side])

195 Unused (Derivative time limiter (high) [cool-side])

196 Unused (Derivative time limiter (low) [cool-side])

197 Unused (Open/Close output neutral zone)

198 Unused (Open/Close output differential gap)

Name

















199 Unused (Action at feedback resistance (FBR) input error) Unused (No applicable models)

200 Unused (Feedback adjustment) Unused (No applicable models)

201 Unused (Control motor time)

202 Unused (Integrated output limiter)



203 Unused (Valve action at STOP)

204 Startup tuning (ST)

205 Unused (ST proportional band adjusting factor)

206 Unused (ST integral time adjusting factor)

207 Unused (ST derivative time adjusting factor)


Input 1_Startup tuning (ST)




Register address

HEX DEC

6.3.1

Reference No.

00B7 183 

00B8

00B9

00BA

00BB

00BC

184

185

186

187

188











00BD

00BE

00BF

00C0

00C1

00C2

00C3

189

190

191

192

193

194

195















00C4

00C5

00C6

00C7

00C8

00C9

00CA

196

197

198

199

200

201

202















00CB

00CC

00CD

00CE

203

204

205

206

61







No.


208 ST start condition

209 Unused (Automatic temperature rise group)

210 Unused (Automatic temperature rise learning)

211 Unused (Automatic temperature rise dead time)

212 Unused (Automatic temperature rise gradient data)

213 Unused (RUN/STOP group)


215 Soak time unit

216 Setting limiter high

217 Setting limiter low

218 Unused (PV transfer function)



221 Unused (Action at saturated output)

222 Unused

223 Unused

224 Unused

225 Control area Local/External transfer

Name

ST start condition







Setting change rate limiter unit time

Soak time unit




PV flashing display at input error

Overlap/Deadband reference point


Unused

Unused

Unused

Control area Local/External transfer

Register address

HEX DEC

6.3.1

Reference No.

00CF 207 297

00D0

00D1

00D2

00D3

00D4

208

209

210

211

212











00D5 213 355

00D6

00D7

00D8

00D9

214

215

216

217

00DA

00DB

00DC

00DD

00DE

00DF

00E0

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

356

357

358



190

322









66

6.4.5 Memory area data equivalent to the FB series (Area designation method) [Modbus single word]

Register addresses 0500H to 0548H are used to check and change set values belonging to the Memory area.

For the details of attribute, data range and factory set values, refer to  Memory area 1 data (P.6-80), 6.3.2 Memory area data (Direct designation method) [Modbus double word] .


No.


Name


Register address

HEX DEC

6.3.2

Reference No.

1 Setting memory area number

Specify the Memory area No.

Data range: 1 to 16 (Factory set vaule: 1)

0500 1280 





6 Control loop break alarm (LBA) time














0501 1281 4

0502 1282 6

0503 1283 8

0504 1284 10

0505 1285 21

7 LBA deadband

8 Set value (SV)



0506

0507

1286

1287

22

1

9 Proportional band [heat-side]

10 Integral time [heat-side]

11 Derivative time [heat-side]




0508

0509

050A

1288

1289

1290

12

13

14

No.


12 Control response parameter

13 Proportional band [cool-side]

14 Integral time [cool-side]

15 Derivative time [cool-side]

16 Overlap/Deadband

17 Manual reset

18 Setting change rate limiter (up)

19 Setting change rate limiter (down)

20 Area soak time

21 Link area number

22 Unused

23

24

25

26









27

28

29

30









31

32





 33

Name









Area soak time

Link area number

Unused
















Register address

HEX DEC

6.3.2

Reference No.

050B 1291 15

050C

050D

1292

1293

34

35

050E 1294 36

0510

0511

1296

1297

17

43

0512

0513

0514

0515

1298

1299

1300

1301

0516

0517

1302

1303

0518 1304 3

0519 1305 4

1

2

44

41

42



051A 1306 5

051B 1307 6

051C 1308 7

051D 1309 8

051E 1310 9

051F 1311 10

0520 1312 11

No.

45

46

47

48

41

42

43

44

37

38

39

40

34

35

36

53

54

55

49

50

51

52














































Name






Input 1_Proactive intensity


Input 1_FF amount





Input 2_Proportional band

Input 2_Integral time

Input 2_Derivative time


Input 2_Proactive intensity


Input 2_FF amount

Input 2_Output limiter high




0530

0531

0532

0533

0534

0535

0536

0528

0529

052A

052B

052C

052D

052E

052F

Register address

HEX DEC

6.3.2

Reference No.

0521 1313 12

0522

0523

1314

1315

13

14

0524

0525

0526

0527

1316

1317

1318

1319

15

16

17

18

1320

1321

1322

1323

1324

1325

1326

1327

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

1328

1329

1330

1331

1332

1333

1334

31

32

33

27

28

29

30

No.

56

57

58

59

60

71

72

73

74

67

68

69

70

61

62

63

64

65

66

75

76

77

78

79


















































Name





Input 1_Overlap/Deadband




Select Trigger type for Memory area transfer

Area soak time

Link area number



Input 1_Auto/Manual transfer selection (Area)

Input 1_Manipulated output value (Area)



Input 2_Auto/Manual transfer selection (Area)

Input 2_Manipulated output value (Area)

Remote/Local transfer selection (Area)







1346

1347

1348

1349

1350

1351

1352

1353

1340

1341

1342

1343

1344

1345

1354

1355

1356

1357

1358

0542

0543

0544

0545

0546

0547

0548

0549

053C

053D

053E

053F

0540

0541

054A

054B

054C

054D

054E

Register address

HEX DEC

6.3.2

Reference No.

0537 1335 34

0538

0539

1336

1337

35

36

053A 1338 37

053B 1339 38

49

50

51

52

45

46

47

48

39

40

41

42

43

44

53

54

55

56

57

No.

95

91

92

93

94

87

88

89

90

83

84

85

86

80

81

82


































Name


















0556

0557

0558

0559

055A

055B

055C

055D

055E

Register address

HEX DEC

6.3.2

Reference No.

054F 1359 58

0550

0551

1360

1361

59

60

0552

0553

0554

0555

1362

1363

1364

1365

61

62

63

64

1366

1367

1368

1369

1370

1371

1372

1373

1374

69

70

71

72

65

66

67

68

73

TROUBLE

SHOOTING

This chapter describes how to cope with errors during the communication.

7.1 RKC Communication ....................................................................... 7-3

7.2 Modbus ........................................................................................... 7-4

IMR03D07-E1

7-1

7. TROUBLESHOOTING

 To prevent electric shock or instrument failure, always turn off the system power before replacing the instrument.

 To prevent electric shock or instrument failure, always turn off the power before mounting or removing the instrument.







To prevent electric shock or instrument failure, do not turn on the power until all wiring is completed. Make sure that the wiring is correct before applying power to the instrument.

To prevent electric shock or instrument failure, do not touch the inside of the instrument.

All wiring must be performed by authorized personnel with electrical experience in this type of work.

All wiring must be completed before power is turned on to prevent electric shock, instrument failure, or incorrect action. The power must be turned off before repairing work for input break and output failure including replacement of sensor, contactor or SSR, and all wiring must be completed before power is turned on again.

7. TROUBLESHOOTING

This section lists some of the main causes and solutions for communication problems.

If you cannot solve a problem, please contact RKC sales office or the agent, on confirming the type name and specifications of the product.

7.1 RKC Communication

No response Wrong connection, no connection or disconnection of the communication cable

Breakage, wrong wiring, or imperfect contact of the communication cable

Mismatch of the setting data of communication speed and data bit configuration with those of the host computer

Wrong address setting

Error in the data format

Transmission line is not set to the receive state after data send (for RS-485)

Communication protocol setting is wrong

EOT return The specified identifier is invalid

Error in the data format

NAK return Error occurs on the line (parity bit error, framing error, etc.)

The data exceeds the setting range

The specified identifier is invalid

Solution

Confirm the connection method or condition and connect correctly

Confirm the wiring or connector and repair or replace the wrong one

Confirm the settings and set them correctly

Re-examine the communication program

Set “0: RKC communication” at

Communication protocol referring to

3.1 Setting of Communication Parameter

(P. 3-2) .

Confirm the identifier is correct or that with the correct function is specified. Otherwise correct it

Reexamine the communication program

Confirm the cause of error, and solve the problem appropriately. (Confirm the transmitting data, and resend data)

Confirm the setting range and transmit correct data

Confirm the identifier is correct or that with the correct function is specified. Otherwise correct it

IMR03D07-E1

7-3

7. TROUBLESHOOTING

7.2 Modbus

No response Wrong connection, no connection or disconnection of the communication cable

Breakage, wrong wiring, or imperfect contact of the communication cable

Mismatch of the setting data of communication speed and data bit configuration with those of the host computer

Wrong address setting

A transmission error (overrun error, framing error, parity error or CRC-16 error) is found in the query message

The time interval between adjacent data in the query message is too long, exceeding 24-bit time

Communication protocol setting is wrong

Error code

1

Error code

2

Error code

3

Error code

4

Function code error

(Specifying nonexistent function code)

When the mismatched address is specified.

When the specified number of data items in the query message exceeds the maximum number of data items available

Self-diagnostic error

Solution

Confirm the connection method or condition and connect correctly

Confirm the wiring or connector and repair or replace the wrong one

Confirm the settings and set them correctly

Re-transmit after time-out occurs or verify communication program

Set “1” or “2” at Communication protocol referring to 3.1 Setting of Communication

Parameter (P. 3-2) .

1 : Modbus

(Order of data transfer:

high-order word to low-order word)

2: Modbus

(Order of data a transfer:

low-order word to high-order word)

Confirm the function code

Confirm the address of holding register

Confirm the setting data

Turn off the power to the instrument.

If the same error occurs when the power is turned back on, please contact RKC sales office or the agent.

7-4

IMR03D07-E1

SPECIFICATIONS

This chapter describes the specification of the host communication.

8.1 RKC Communication ....................................................................... 8-2

8.2 Modbus ........................................................................................... 8-3

8.3 Loader Communication ................................................................... 8-4

IMR03D07-E1

8-1

8. SPECIFICATIONS

8.1 RKC Communication

Interface: Based on RS-485, EIA standard

Based on RS-422A, EIA standard

2-wire system, half-duplex multi-drop connection Connection method:

Synchronous method: Start/Stop synchronous type

Communication speed: 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps

Protocol: ANSI X3.28-1976 subcategories 2.5 and A4

Polling/Selecting type

Data bit configuration: Start 1

Data bit: 7 or 8

Parity bit: Without, Odd or Even

Stop bit: 1 or 2

Error control: Vertical parity (With parity bit selected)

Horizontal parity (BCC check)

Communication code: ASCII 7-bit code

Termination resistor: Externally terminal connected (120 Ω 1/2 W)

Xon/Xoff control: None

Maximum connections: Up to 31 controllers

Signal logic: RS-485/RS-422A

Signal logic

V (A)  V (B)  1.5 V

V (A)  V (B)   1.5 V

Logic

0 (SPACE)

1 (MARK)

Voltage between V (A) and V (B) is the voltage of (A) terminal for the (B) terminal.

Maximum transmission distance:

1.2 km (This is the maximum value specified in the standard and actual value depends on the product specification.)

8. SPECIFICATIONS

8.2 Modbus

Interface:

Connection method:

Based on RS-485, EIA standard

Based on RS-422A, EIA standard

2-wire system, half-duplex multi-drop connection


Communication speed: 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps


Data bit: 8

Parity bit: Without, Odd or Even

Stop bit: 1 or 2

Protocol: Modbus

Signal transmission mode: Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) mode

Function code: 03H (Read holding registers)

06H (Preset single register)

08H (Diagnostics: loopback test)

10H (Preset multiple registers [Write multiple registers])

Error check method: CRC-16

Error code:

Termination resistor:

1: Function code error

2: When the mismatched address is specified.

3:  The maximum number (Read from a read holding resistor or write to

Preset multiple resistors [Write multiple registers]) has been exceeded.

 The setting of the number of data (the number of requested byte) is not set

to a double of the requested number of data at the time of “Preset multiple

registers (Write multiple registers)”

4: Self-diagnostic error response

Externally terminal connected (Example: 120  1/2 W)

Maximum connections: Up to 31 controllers

Signal logic: RS-485/RS-422A

Signal logic

V (A)  V (B)  1.5 V

V (A)  V (B)   1.5 V

Logic

0 (SPACE)

1 (MARK)

Voltage between V (A) and V (B) is the voltage of (A) terminal for the (B) terminal.

Maximum transmission distance:

1.2 km (This is the maximum value specified in the standard and actual value depends on the product specification.)

IMR03D07-E1

8-3

8. SPECIFICATIONS

8.3 Loader Communication

Protocol: For RKC communication protocol only

(ANSI X3.28-1976 subcategories 2.5 and A4)


Communication speed: 38400 bps


Data bit: 8

Parity bit: Without

Stop bit: 1

Number of communication data digits: 7(fixed)

Maximum connections: 1 point (COM-K2 only)

Connection method:

Interval time:

COM-K2 loader cable (W-BV-05)

10 ms

When the instrument is powered off, power can be supplied to the instrument from COM-K2 (or

COM-K version 1). This function is exclusive for parameter setting, and the instrument functions as follows.

 Control is stopped (Output is off, relay remains open).

 Host communication is stopped.

 The PV/SV monitor shows “ LoAd ” for the Measured value (PV) display and “----” for the Set value (SV) display. The LCD backlight is partially turned off.

While the instrument is powered by COM-K2 (or COM-K version 1), if power is applied to the instrument, the instrument will be reset and starts for normal operation.

When the instrument is normally powered, the host communication can be used simultaneously.

8-4

IMR03D07-E1

APPENDIX

A.1 ASCII 7-Bit Code Table ................................................................... A-2

A.2 Communication Data Equivalent to Our REX-F400/700/900 .......... A-3

IMR03D07-E1

A-1

A. APPENDIX

A.1 ASCII 7-Bit Code Table

This table is only for use with RKC communication. b4 b1

0 0 0 0 0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ‘ p

0 0 0 1 1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q

0 0 1 0 2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r

0 0 1 1 3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s

0 1 0 0 4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t

0 1 0 1 5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u

0 1 1 0 6 ACK SYM & 6 F V f v

0 1 1 1 7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w

1 0 0 0 8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x

1 0 0 1 9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y

1 0 1 0 A LF SUB * : J Z j z

1 0 1 1 B VT ESC + ; K [ k {

1 1 0 0 C FF FS , < L ¥ l |

1 1 0 1 D CR GS - = M ] m }

1 1 1 0 E SO RS . > N ^ n ˜

1 1 1 1 F SI US / ? O _ o DEL

A. APPENDIX

A.2 Communication Data Equivalent to Our REX-F400/700/900

The RKC communication identifiers for the REX-F400/700/900 can be used to handle the communication data of the GZ400/900 corresponding to the REX-F400/700/900. If there is no relevant communication data on the GZ400/900, dummy data is used.

To use the data equivalent to our REX-F400/700/900, you have to set “1” at Input data type ( INdT ).

This means RKC communication data (6 digits).




REX-F400/700/900 equivalent communication data items not available on GZ400/900

REX-F400/700/900 communication data name

Bar-graph display selection DA

Second alarm energized/ de-energized selection

Local mode/computer mode identification

NB

RA

Operation execution (RUN)/STOP transfer DH

OA First alarm action selection at input abnormality

Second alarm action selection at input abnormality

OB

Digits

6

6

6

6

Data range

RO

R/W


R/W

R/W


0

0

0

0

0

0

IMR03D07-E1

A-3

MEMO

The first edition: DEC. 2019 [IMQ00]

R

RKC INSTRUMENT INC.

HEADQUARTERS: 16-6, KUGAHARA 5-CHOME, OHTA-KU TOKYO 146-8515 JAPAN

PHONE: 03-3751-9799 (+81 3 3751 9799)

Website:

IMR03D07-E1 DEC.